summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-03 00:00:56 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-03 00:00:56 +0000
commit06ea056d85ec0645fb1b94f537bed4b29688389a (patch)
tree37a07e31d984dcb365a7bf2c4aabb5486371d6cd /Master/texmf
parenta540e256be85df29c60ac323d4460c6cde1d9350 (diff)
trunk/Master/texmf/doc/texi2html
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@43 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/texi2html/texi2html.html6072
1 files changed, 6072 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/texi2html/texi2html.html b/Master/texmf/doc/texi2html/texi2html.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d55c003b90f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/texi2html/texi2html.html
@@ -0,0 +1,6072 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html401/loose.dtd">
+<html>
+<!--Copyright C 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003
+ Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ Portions of texi2html
+ Copyright C 1999, 2000 Lionel Cons
+ Copyright C 1999, 2000 Karl Berry
+ Copyright C 1999, 2000 Olaf Bachmann
+ Copyright C 2002, 2003 Patrice Dumas
+ Copyright C 2001, 2002, 2003 Derek Price
+ Copyright C many others.
+
+
+ Portions of this manual
+ Copyright C 1999, 2000 Karl Heinz Marbaise (manual)
+ Copyright C 2003 Patrice Dumas (manual)
+ Copyright C 2003 Derek Price (manual)
+
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim
+copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and
+this permission notice are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified
+versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim
+copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is
+distributed under the terms of a permission notice
+identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations
+of this manual into another language, under the above
+conditions for modified versions, except that this
+permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+-->
+<!-- Created on February, 3 2005 by texi2html 1.76 -->
+<!--
+Written by: Lionel Cons <Lionel.Cons@cern.ch> (original author)
+ Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+ Olaf Bachmann <obachman@mathematik.uni-kl.de>
+ and many others.
+Maintained by: Many creative people <dev@texi2html.cvshome.org>
+Send bugs and suggestions to <users@texi2html.cvshome.org>
+
+-->
+<head>
+<title>Texi2HTML - Texinfo to HTML v1.76: Texi2HTML</title>
+
+<meta name="description" content="Texi2HTML - Texinfo to HTML v1.76: Texi2HTML">
+<meta name="keywords" content="Texi2HTML - Texinfo to HTML v1.76: Texi2HTML">
+<meta name="resource-type" content="document">
+<meta name="distribution" content="global">
+<meta name="Generator" content="texi2html 1.76">
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+a.summary-letter {text-decoration: none}
+pre.display {font-family: serif}
+pre.format {font-family: serif}
+pre.menu-comment {font-family: serif}
+pre.menu-preformatted {font-family: serif}
+pre.smalldisplay {font-family: serif; font-size: smaller}
+pre.smallexample {font-size: smaller}
+pre.smallformat {font-family: serif; font-size: smaller}
+pre.smalllisp {font-size: smaller}
+span.sansserif {font-family:sans-serif; font-weight:normal;}
+ul.toc {list-style: none}
+-->
+</style>
+
+
+</head>
+
+<body lang="en" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" text="#000000" link="#0000FF" vlink="#800080" alink="#FF0000">
+
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="settitle">Texi2HTML</h1>
+<p>Copyright &copy; 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003
+ Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><p> Portions of <code>texi2html</code>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 1999, 2000 Lionel Cons<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 1999, 2000 Karl Berry<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 1999, 2000 Olaf Bachmann<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 2002, 2003 Patrice Dumas<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 2001, 2002, 2003 Derek Price<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; many others.<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td><p> Portions of this manual
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 1999, 2000 Karl Heinz Marbaise (manual)<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 2003 Patrice Dumas (manual)<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td> </td><td><p> Copyright &copy; 2003 Derek Price (manual)<br>
+</p></td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim
+copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and
+this permission notice are preserved on all copies.
+</p>
+<p>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified
+versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim
+copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is
+distributed under the terms of a permission notice
+identical to this one.
+</p>
+<p>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations
+of this manual into another language, under the above
+conditions for modified versions, except that this
+permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+</p>
+
+
+
+<a name="Top"></a>
+<a name="SEC_Top"></a>
+
+
+<p>This manual, last updated 1 February 2005, describes version 1.76
+of the <code>texi2html</code> Perl script which converts
+<a href="http://www.texinfo.org">Texinfo</a> into <a href="http://w3c.org">HTML</a>.
+</p>
+<p>Please send bug reports concerning this manual to the Texi2HTML user
+discussion list <a href="mailto:user@texi2html.cvshome.org">user@texi2html.cvshome.org</a>. Please state the exact
+version of the manual which contains the bug, as given above.
+</p>
+
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example"><strong>This manual is currently under construction and of course incomplete. ;-)</strong>
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC1">1. Overview</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC3">2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+ Obtaining a copy of the <code>texi2html</code>
+ source code distribution
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC4">3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Installing <code>texi2html</code>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC5">4. Invoking <code>texi2html</code></a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Description of the command line options
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC14">5. Overview of initialization files content and loading</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> What kind of variables and subroutines appear
+ in init files and how they are called
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC17">6. Fine tuning of the page layout</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC47">7. Customizing <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style in init files</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Fine tuning of the <acronym>HTML</acronym> elements
+ associated with the texinfo constructs
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC84">A. Internationalization</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Help translating !
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC87">B. Command Line Option Index</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC88">C. Variable Index</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC89">D. Concept Index</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">
+</pre></th></tr></table>
+<hr size="1">
+<a name="Overview"></a>
+<a name="SEC1"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC2" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[ &lt;&lt; ]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC3" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 1. Overview </h1>
+
+
+<p><a href="http://www.texinfo.org">Texinfo</a> is the official
+documentation format of the <a href="http://www.gnu.org">GNU</a>
+project. It uses a single source file to produce both
+online information and printed output.
+</p>
+<p>It is often desirable to have a way to produce
+<acronym>HTML</acronym> from Texinfo sources, as GNU-Info files are
+produced. It is much simpler to run a converter than it is to
+rewrite all the documentation in <acronym>HTML</acronym>, especially
+considering that there is so much Texinfo documentation in
+the world.
+</p>
+<p>Some time ago <code>makeinfo</code> wasn't able to produce
+<acronym>HTML</acronym> output format, but people still wanted documentation in
+<acronym>HTML</acronym>. This was the birthing hour for
+<code>texi2html</code>. The basic purpose of <code>texi2html</code>
+is to convert Texinfo documents into <acronym>HTML</acronym>.
+</p>
+<p>Since then, <acronym>HTML</acronym> support in <code>makeinfo</code> has improved, but
+<code>texi2html</code> is still stronger in many areas, including the degree to
+which it allows customization. With <code>texi2html</code>, some important
+aspects of the resulting <acronym>HTML</acronym> files may be specified via command
+line options, and configuration files provide an even finer degree of control
+over the final output, allowing most every aspect of the final output not
+specified in the Texinfo input file to be specified. Configuration files are
+written in <code>perl</code>, like the main program, and anything which may be
+specified on the command line may also be specified within a configuration
+file.
+</p>
+<p>For an example of the kind of pages <code>texi2html</code> is capable of
+producing, have a look at the following sites:
+<a href="http://www.singular.uni-kl.de/Manual/html/">the Singular Manual</a>,
+<a href="http://ccvs.cvshome.org/docs/manual">the Cederqvist (CVS Manual)</a>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC2">1.1 Why <code>texi2html</code> and not <code>makeinfo</code>?</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="whytexi2html"></a>
+<a name="SEC2"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC1" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC3" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC1" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC1" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC3" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 1.1 Why <code>texi2html</code> and not <code>makeinfo</code>? </h2>
+
+
+<p>You would like to produce <acronym>HTML</acronym> files from your existing Texinfo
+files? There are two programs you can use to do this. The first is
+<code>makeinfo</code> (see <a href="texinfo.html#Generating-HTML">(texinfo)Generating HTML</a>).
+The second is <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The design goal of <code>makeinfo</code>'s <acronym>HTML</acronym> output was to produce
+readable <acronym>HTML</acronym> output. It is now possible to use <acronym>CSS</acronym>
+for <acronym>HTML</acronym> customization. Another possibility is to use intermediate
+formats, like docbook or <code>mekeinfo</code> <acronym>XML</acronym>
+and <acronym>XSL</acronym> stylesheets to customize the resulting document. Still the
+output produced by <code>makeinfo</code> isn't customizable.
+</p>
+<p>The current development of <code>texi2html</code> tries to
+provide for producing the more interesting and sophisticated <acronym>HTML</acronym>
+pages that today's Internet users have come to expect.
+The goal behind <code>texi2html</code> is to generate attractive <acronym>HTML</acronym> by
+default but also to allow users considerable freedom to affect the final
+style and design of the output <acronym>HTML</acronym> pages. This is achieved via
+command line options and flexible configuration files.
+</p>
+
+<p>In contrast to the <acronym>HTML</acronym> produced by <code>makeinfo --html</code> (the
+<code>makeinfo</code> program is part of the Texinfo distribution), the
+<code>texi2html</code> program, among other differences, allows for the
+customization of the entire page layout, including headers, footers, style
+sheets, etc., allows for customization of the low level <acronym>HTML</acronym>
+formatting, provides for splitting documents at various levels, and provides
+for using the <code>latex2html</code> program to convert <code>@tex</code> sections of
+the Texinfo source.
+</p>
+<p>The focus on <acronym>HTML</acronym> is still present but with the help of the
+customization files it is now possible to use <code>texi2html</code> to
+produce other formats as well. <code>texi2html</code> may for example be
+turned into a texinfo to roff translator with the help of a customization file
+provided with the distribution.
+</p>
+<p><code>texi2html</code> should reasonably convert all Texinfo
+4.8 constructs. If you find it does not, please send a bug report to the
+<a href="mailto:users@texi2html.cvshome.org">users@texi2html.cvshome.org</a> email list.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Obtaining-texi2html"></a>
+<a name="SEC3"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC2" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC4" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC1" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC4" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code> </h1>
+
+<p>The latest version of the source code for <code>texi2html</code> should be
+available from <a href="http://texi2html.cvshome.org">texi2html.cvshome.org</a>.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Installation"></a>
+<a name="SEC4"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC3" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC3" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code> </h1>
+
+<p>To install <code>texi2html</code>, you must first obtain a copy of the
+source distribution. See section <a href="#SEC3">Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a>.
+</p>
+<p><code>texi2html</code> also requires <code>perl</code> version
+5.004 or above. The current version has not been tested
+extensively on versions of <code>perl</code> below 5.6, however.
+</p>
+<p><code>texi2html</code> is a standard Automake-based distribution.
+If you have a source version, you should run <code>./configure</code>
+to regenerate the executable <tt>`texi2html'</tt> file. <code>./configure</code>
+accepts options to select the installation directory for the <tt>`texi2html'</tt>
+file, the default directories <code>texi2html</code> will use to look for
+configuration files, and other details. Run <code>./configure --help</code> for
+more information.
+</p>
+<p>Running <code>./configure</code> combines four files into the final
+<tt>`texi2html'</tt> program file:
+</p><ul class="toc">
+<li> <tt>`texi2html.pl'</tt> contains the base program,
+</li><li> <tt>`MySimple.pm'</tt> handles the command line options,
+</li><li> <tt>`texi2html.init'</tt> is the default configuration file, and
+</li><li> <tt>`T2h_i18n.pm'</tt> is used for internationalization.
+</li><li> <tt>`translations.pl'</tt> contains the translations of the strings used in
+documents.
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>Running <code>./configure</code> also builds the <code>make</code> configuration
+files (<tt>`Makefile'</tt>s). To make the documentation run <code>make</code>.
+</p>
+<p><code>make install</code> performs the installation to the locations specified to
+the <code>./configure</code> script. This usually involves placing the actual
+<tt>`texi2html'</tt> file someplace in your path, such as <tt>`/usr/local/bin'</tt> or
+<tt>`/usr/bin'</tt>.
+</p>
+<p>Installing <code>texi2html</code> in your path should be sufficient
+to run it. To use default initialization files, or a configuration file for
+LaTeX2HTML when using <code>latex2html</code> to convert <code>@tex</code> sections
+(see section <a href="#SEC12">Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a>), install them in the package data directory
+specified to configure. This is <tt>`/usr/local/share/texi2html/'</tt> by default,
+but depends on the value of the <a name="IDX1"></a>
+<samp>`--pkgdatadir=<var>dir</var>'</samp> option passed to
+the <code>./configure</code> script. Files used for strings customization and
+internationalization are also searched for in the <tt>`i18n'</tt> directory
+of this directory. See section <a href="#SEC13">Use initialization files for fine tuning</a> for more.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Invoking-texi2html"></a>
+<a name="SEC5"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC4" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC6" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC4" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 4. Invoking <code>texi2html</code> </h1>
+
+<p>To produce an <acronym>HTML</acronym> manual, run <code>texi2html</code> with a Texinfo
+file as an argument. For example, this manual is created with:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$ texi2html texi2html.texi
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The behaviour of <code>texi2html</code> may be changed with command line
+options. These command line options are always associated with corresponding
+<code>perl</code> variables which may appear in init files, and these
+variables are presented in this chapter each time a switch is described.
+</p>
+<p>Boolean command line switches always have a corresponding negated switch,
+obtained by prepending <samp>`no'</samp> or <samp>`no-'</samp> to the switch name. For example
+<a name="IDX2"></a>
+<samp>`--nomenu'</samp> does the reverse of <a name="IDX3"></a>
+<samp>`--menu'</samp>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> The <acronym>HTML</acronym> output may be split at
+ different levels
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Customizing page layout
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Specifying initialization files for fine tuning
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Splitting-output"></a>
+<a name="SEC6"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC7" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document </h2>
+
+<p>The <acronym>HTML</acronym> manual resulting from the processing of the Texinfo source
+may be split into files at different levels. This is specified with the
+option <a name="IDX4"></a>
+<samp>`--split'</samp> which takes an argument, namely the level of splitting
+(variable: <a name="IDX5"></a>
+<code>$SPLIT</code>). This level may be:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <samp>`chapter'</samp></dt>
+<dd><p>The document is split at <code>@chapter</code>, <code>@appendix</code>, or <code>@unnumbered</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <samp>`section'</samp></dt>
+<dd><p>The document is split at the same places as it is using the <samp>`chapter'</samp>
+argument, and also at <code>@section</code>, <code>@appendixsec</code> or
+<code>@unnumberedsec</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <samp>`node'</samp></dt>
+<dd><p>The document is split at every sectioning command. It is not necessarily
+split at each node, if the <code>@node</code> structure doesn't correspond with
+the sectioning command structure (see below).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <samp>`none'</samp></dt>
+<dd><p>The document isn't split. This is the default.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>There are two kinds of commands which may be used to define sectioning
+elements in Texinfo: <code>@node</code> and the structuring commands (<code>@top</code>,
+<code>@section</code>, <code>@appendixsubsec</code>, and so on). A node just preceding
+a structuring command is considered to be part of the same sectioning element
+as that command. If the <code>@node Top</code> isn't associated with a structuring
+command it also defines a sectioning element.
+</p>
+<p>By default, nodes which aren't associated with a structuring command are not
+considered to be sectioning commands. They are always considered to be part
+of a sectioning element defined by a structuring command. It is possible to
+change this behaviour via the <a name="IDX6"></a>
+<samp>`--use-nodes'</samp> option (variable
+<a name="IDX7"></a>
+<code>$USE_NODES</code>). In this case, nodes not associated with structuring
+commands are also considered to be sectioning commands defining a sectioning
+element.
+</p>
+<p>This default behaviour mimics <code>texi2dvi</code> behaviour, which ignores
+<code>@node</code> commands for the purprose of sectioning, while the second
+looks like <code>makeinfo</code> behaviour (see <a href="texinfo.html#Two-Paths">(texinfo)Two Paths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>As an illustration, the following table shows how a sample Texinfo document is
+divided into sectioning elements when <a name="IDX8"></a>
+<samp>`--use-nodes'</samp> is used and not:
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><p> Texinfo code
+</p></td><td>
+</td><td>
+<p>default case
+</p></td><td>
+</td><td>
+<p>with <a name="IDX9"></a>
+<samp>`--use-nodes'</samp>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td>
+<br>
+<br>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@node node1
+@chapter node 1
+node1 text
+
+@node node2
+node2 text
+
+@node node3
+node3 text
+@chapter node 3
+chapter text
+</pre></td></tr></table></td><td>
+</td><td>
+<p>first element:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@node node1
+@chapter node 1
+node1 text
+
+@node node2
+node2 text
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>second element:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@node node3
+node3 text
+@chapter node 3
+chapter text
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+</td><td>
+</td><td>
+<p>first element:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@node node1
+@chapter node 1
+node1 text
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>second element:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@node node2
+node2 text
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>third element:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@node node3
+node3 text
+@chapter node 3
+chapter text
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Output-files"></a>
+<a name="SEC7"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC6" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC8" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.2 Setting output file and directory names </h2>
+
+<p>The manual name is constructed by stripping the <samp>`.texi'</samp>,
+<samp>`.txi'</samp>, <samp>`.texinfo'</samp>, or <samp>`.txinfo'</samp> extension from the Texinfo file
+name.
+</p>
+<p>By default, <code>texi2html</code> generates the manual file in the current
+directory if the manual isn't split. A <samp>`.html'</samp> file extension is appended
+to the manual name.
+</p>
+<p>If the manual is split the files are put in a directory named after the
+manual name. The file name is constructed using the manual name as basename.
+An underscore followed by a number is appended
+to the basename for each files corresponding with sectioning elements, with the
+exception of the top element. For the top element there nothing appended.
+The files containing special elements pages
+have an underscore and a 3 letter code corresponding to their content
+(<samp>`toc'</samp> for table of contents, <samp>`abt'</samp> for about, <samp>`ovr'</samp> for
+overview) appended. Lastly, an <samp>`.html'</samp> file extension is appended.
+</p>
+<p>Thus, if the texinfo file <tt>`afile.texi'</tt> is processed and split at chapters
+into 3 files, the generated files (in directory <tt>`afile'</tt>) will be:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">afile.html --&gt; <code>@node Top</code> or <code>@top</code> section
+afile_1.html --&gt; Chapter 1
+afile_2.html --&gt; Chapter 2
+afile_toc.html --&gt; Table of Contents
+afile_abt.html --&gt; About Page
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>This default behavior may be modified by several command line options. If the
+output isn't split, the prefix file name may be overrided by the
+<a name="IDX10"></a>
+<samp>`--output'</samp> command line option (variable <a name="IDX11"></a>
+<code>$OUT</code>). If the output
+is split, and <a name="IDX12"></a>
+<samp>`--output'</samp> is set, the files are placed in the directory
+specified by the argument to the option.
+</p>
+<p>The basename may be overridden with <a name="IDX13"></a>
+<samp>`--prefix'</samp> (variable
+<a name="IDX14"></a>
+<code>$PREFIX</code>). If <a name="IDX15"></a>
+<samp>`--short-ext'</samp> is given, <samp>`.htm'</samp> is appended
+instead of <samp>`.html'</samp> in the final step (variable <a name="IDX16"></a>
+<code>$SHORTEXTN</code>).
+The <a name="IDX17"></a>
+<samp>`--top-file'</samp> option
+overrides the top element file name (variable <a name="IDX18"></a>
+<code>$TOP_FILE</code>). This can
+be used to name the top element file <samp>`index.html'</samp>. Similarly,
+<a name="IDX19"></a>
+<samp>`--toc-file'</samp> changes the name of the table of contents file (variable
+<a name="IDX20"></a>
+<code>$TOC_FILE</code>).
+</p>
+<p>Reusing the example above, but this time calling <code>texi2html</code> like so:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$ texi2html -split chapter -prefix manual -short-ext -top-file index.htm -toc-file contents.htm afile.texi
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>we get, in <tt>`manual'</tt>:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">index.htm --&gt; <code>@node Top</code> or <code>@top</code> section
+manual_1.htm --&gt; Chapter 1
+manual_2.htm --&gt; Chapter 2
+contents.htm --&gt; Table of Contents
+manual_abt.htm --&gt; About Page
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The file names generated by <code>texi2html</code> differ from those generated
+by <code>makeinfo</code>. <code>makeinfo</code> uses the node name to construct
+the file names while splitting at nodes. It is possible to get the same
+behaviour out of <code>texi2html</code> by specifying the
+<a name="IDX21"></a>
+<samp>`--node-files'</samp> option (variable <a name="IDX22"></a>
+<code>$NODE_FILES</code>). If the output
+isn't split at nodes, <code>texi2html</code> will still output files named after
+the nodes, without real content but redirecting to the right file.
+The default is false for this option.
+This trick enables the generated <acronym>HTML</acronym> manual to be a
+target for the cross-references of other manuals generated by
+<code>makeinfo</code> or <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Expansion"></a>
+<a name="SEC8"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC7" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC9" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded </h2>
+
+<p>The default for <code>texi2html</code> is to expand the <code>@ifhtml</code>,
+<code>@html</code>, and <code>@menu</code> regions, all the <code>@ifnot</code> regions
+except <code>@ifnothtml</code>, and no other <code>@if</code> regions.
+</p>
+<p>It is possible to expand other regions by setting <a name="IDX23"></a>
+<samp>`--if&lt;region&gt;'</samp>,
+where <samp>`&lt;region&gt;'</samp> is replaced by the literal name of the region (for
+example, <samp>`--iftex'</samp>). Symetrically, if <a name="IDX24"></a>
+<samp>`--no-if&lt;region&gt;'</samp> is
+specified, the <samp>`&lt;region&gt;'</samp> region is ignored. The configuration file
+array, <a name="IDX25"></a>
+<code>@EXPAND</code>, holds the names of regions which should be
+expanded. The only region name present in <code>@EXPAND</code> in the default case
+is <samp>`html'</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>If <a name="IDX26"></a>
+<samp>`--nomenu'</samp> is set, the <code>@menu</code> sections are not expanded
+(variable <a name="IDX27"></a>
+<code>$SHOW_MENU</code>). The default is to expand <code>@menu</code>
+sections.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Texinfo-related-options"></a>
+<a name="SEC9"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC8" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC10" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features </h2>
+
+<p>Miscalleneous Texinfo related things may be specified via command line options.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <a name="IDX28"></a>
+<p><samp>`--lang=<var>lang</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>Sets the document language similar to the Texinfo directive,
+<code>@documentlanguage <var>lang</var></code> (variable <a name="IDX29"></a>
+<code>$LANG</code>).
+The default is <samp>`en'</samp>, that is, use the english language strings.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX30"></a>
+<p><samp>`-D<var>var</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>Sets <var>var</var>. Equivalent to, <code>@set <var>var</var> 1</code>, in Texinfo.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX31"></a>
+<p><samp>`-U<var>var</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>Clears <var>var</var>. Equivalent to, <code>@clear <var>var</var></code>, in Texinfo.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX32"></a>
+<p><samp>`-P<var>dir</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>Prepend <var>dir</var> to the list of directories to search for
+<code>@include</code> files (the associated array is <a name="IDX33"></a>
+<code>@PREPEND_DIRS</code>,
+empty in the default case).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX34"></a>
+<p><samp>`-I<var>dir</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>Append <var>dir</var> to the list of directories to search for
+<code>@include</code> files (the associated array is <a name="IDX35"></a>
+<code>@INCLUDE_DIRS</code>,
+empty in the default case).
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The include files are always searched for in the current directory.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Page-layout-options"></a>
+<a name="SEC10"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC9" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC11" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.5 Page layout related command line options </h2>
+
+<p>If the <a name="IDX36"></a>
+<samp>`--frames'</samp> option is specified, <acronym>HTML</acronym> frames
+are used. A file describing the frame layout is generated, and the
+document page is associated with a frame where the short table of
+content appears (variable <a name="IDX37"></a>
+<code>$FRAMES</code>). The default is not
+to use frames.
+</p>
+<p>It is also possible to suppress the section navigation panel with
+<a name="IDX38"></a>
+<samp>`--nosec-nav'</samp> (variable <a name="IDX39"></a>
+<code>$SECTION_NAVIGATION</code>, the default
+is to output all the navigation panels), and to specify
+whether footnotes should appear at the foot of the same page which contains
+the reference to the note or on a separate page with
+<a name="IDX40"></a>
+<samp>`--separated-footnotes'</samp> (variable <a name="IDX41"></a>
+<code>$SEPARATED_FOOTNOTES</code>).
+The default is to have separated footnotes.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Style-options"></a>
+<a name="SEC11"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC10" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC12" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style </h2>
+
+<p>Miscalleneous style changes may be achieved with command line options.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <a name="IDX42"></a>
+<p><samp>`--doctype=<var>DTD</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dt> <a name="IDX43"></a>
+<p><samp>`--frameset-doctype=<var>DTD</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>You can specify the document DTD by setting these options.
+<a name="IDX44"></a>
+<samp>`--frameset-doctype'</samp> applies to the file describing the frames when
+frames are used (corresponding variables are <a name="IDX45"></a>
+<code>$DOCTYPE</code> and
+<a name="IDX46"></a>
+<code>$FRAMESET_DOCTYPE</code>).
+</p>
+<p>The default for the document doctype is:
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC &quot;-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN&quot; &quot;http://www.w3.org/TR/html401/loose.dtd&quot;&gt;
+</pre></td></tr></table><p>And for the frameset doctype:
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC &quot;-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Frameset//EN&quot; &quot;http://www.w3.org/TR/html401/frameset.dtd&quot;&gt;
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX47"></a>
+<p><samp>`--iso'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>If this option is set, ISO8859 entities are used for some special symbols,
+like Copyright &copy; (variable <a name="IDX48"></a>
+<code>$USE_ISO</code>). It is the default.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX49"></a>
+<p><samp>`--css-include=<var>file</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>This command line switch provides for the inclusion of an external
+Cascading Style Sheet (<acronym>CSS</acronym>) file. More than one file may be
+specified, and <samp>`-'</samp> stands for the standard input (array
+<a name="IDX50"></a>
+<code>@CSS_FILES</code>).
+</p>
+<p>The option use is the same than for <code>makeinfo</code> and is described
+extensively in <a href="texinfo.html#HTML-CSS">(texinfo)HTML CSS</a>.
+Briefly, the <acronym>CSS</acronym> <code>@import</code> lines from the external file
+<acronym>CSS</acronym> file are pasted before the
+<code>texi2html</code> <acronym>CSS</acronym> rules, and the external file <acronym>CSS</acronym>
+rules are pasted after the <code>texi2html</code> <acronym>CSS</acronym> rules.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX51"></a>
+<p><samp>`--html-xref-prefix=<var>path</var>'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>This option sets the base directory for external <acronym>HTML</acronym> texinfo manuals
+(variable <a name="IDX52"></a>
+<code>$EXTERNAL_DIR</code>). Defaults to <samp>`../'</samp>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX53"></a>
+<p><samp>`--def-table'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>If this option is set, <acronym>HTML</acronym> tables are used to format definition
+commands, rather than <acronym>HTML</acronym> definition tables (variable
+<a name="IDX54"></a>
+<code>$DEF_TABLE</code>). Default is false.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX55"></a>
+<p><samp>`--short-ref'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>If this option is set, cross-references are given without section numbers
+(variable <a name="IDX56"></a>
+<code>$SHORT_REF</code>). Default is false.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX57"></a>
+<p><samp>`--number'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>If this option is set, sections are numbered (variable
+<a name="IDX58"></a>
+<code>$NUMBER_SECTIONS</code>). This is the default.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <a name="IDX59"></a>
+<p><samp>`--toc-links'</samp>
+</p></dt>
+<dd><p>If this option is set, links from headings to <acronym>TOC</acronym> entries are
+created (variable <a name="IDX60"></a>
+<code>$TOC_LINKS</code>). Default is false.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Expanding-TeX-regions"></a>
+<a name="SEC12"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC11" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC13" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML </h2>
+
+<p>It is possible to use <a href="http://www.latex2html.org/">LaTeX2HTML</a>
+to process <code>@tex</code> regions and <code>@math{}</code> commands. This is an
+attractive way to display mathematical constructs in the <acronym>HTML</acronym>
+manual. The <a name="IDX61"></a>
+<samp>`--l2h'</samp> option activates this feature (variable
+<var>$L2H</var>). It is usually desirable to expand <code>@tex</code> sections when this
+option is specified (see section <a href="#SEC8">Specifying which regions get expanded</a>). The default is not to use this
+feature.
+</p>
+<p>The <a name="IDX62"></a>
+<samp>`--l2h-l2h=<var>program</var>'</samp> option enables changing the name/location
+of the LaTeX2HTML program processing TeX regions (variable
+<a name="IDX63"></a>
+<code>$L2H_L2H</code>). The default is <code>latex2html</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="IDX64"></a>
+<p><samp>`--l2h-tmp'</samp> sets the directory used for temporary
+files, this name shouldn't contain a dot <samp>`.'</samp>
+(variable is <a name="IDX65"></a>
+<code>$L2H_TMP</code>). Defaults to the current dir.
+</p>
+<p>The file specified by <a name="IDX66"></a>
+<samp>`--l2h-file'</samp> is
+used as LaTeX2HTML init file. It is searched at the same places than
+init files (see section <a href="#SEC13">Use initialization files for fine tuning</a>), and the default is <tt>`l2h.init'</tt>.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Using-init-files"></a>
+<a name="SEC13"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC12" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning </h2>
+
+
+<p>Initialization variables are read first from
+<tt>`/usr/local/share/texi2html/Config'</tt> (the exact location being
+changeable with the <a name="IDX67"></a>
+<samp>`--pkgdatadir=dir'</samp> option of the
+<code>configure</code> script, see <a href="#SEC4">Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a>),
+<tt>`/usr/local/etc/texi2html/Config'</tt> (the exact location being
+changeable with the <a name="IDX68"></a>
+<samp>`--sysconfdir=dir'</samp> option of the
+<code>configure</code> script, see <a href="#SEC4">Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a>), from <tt>`./Config'</tt>
+then from <tt>`$HOME/.texi2html/Config'</tt>. Any command-line option
+can override the corresponding option set in init file, and the
+option <a name="IDX69"></a>
+<samp>`--init-file'</samp> specifies an init file to be loaded, with
+later settings overriding earlier ones.
+</p>
+<p>The init files specified with <a name="IDX70"></a>
+<samp>`--init-file'</samp> are searched
+first in the current directory, then in the <tt>`$HOME/.texi2html/'</tt>
+directory, in the <tt>`/usr/local/etc/texi2html/'</tt> directory and lastly
+in the <tt>`/usr/local/share/texi2html/'</tt> directory.
+</p>
+<p>A file is also included based on the language selected,
+by <a name="IDX71"></a>
+<code>$LANG</code>, <a name="IDX72"></a>
+<samp>`--lang'</samp> or <code>@documentlanguage</code>.
+If no language was selected <samp>`en'</samp> is considered to be
+the language. All the files with name the language name in
+<tt>`/usr/local/share/texi2html/i18n/'</tt>,
+<tt>`/usr/local/etc/texi2html/i18n/'</tt>,
+<tt>`$HOME/.texi2html/i18n/'</tt> and then <tt>`./i18n/'</tt> are included.
+</p>
+<p>The default initialization options are defined in the
+<tt>`texi2html.init'</tt> file contained in the <code>texi2html</code>
+distribution (which gets included near the beginning of the
+<code>texi2html</code> script that gets installed).
+</p>
+<p>To customize <code>texi2html</code> it is best if you copy the
+appropriate sections from the <tt>`texi2html.init'</tt>
+contents into an appropriate local initialization file,
+make the necessary changes there, and then have
+<code>texi2html</code> read this initialization file by one of
+the means described above.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Initialization-files"></a>
+<a name="SEC14"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC13" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC15" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC5" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 5. Overview of initialization files content and loading </h1>
+
+<p>The initialization files are <code>perl</code> files, read as explained
+in <a href="#SEC13">Use initialization files for fine tuning</a>. You don't need to know much of <code>perl</code>
+to do some simple changes in variable values, however, to be able to
+really take advantage of all the features of the initialization file,
+a good knowledge of <code>perl</code> is required.
+</p>
+<p>In initialization file two kind of variables appear. These are normal
+variables (including arrays and hashes) and references on functions.
+The later permits the dynamic redefinition of functions used to produce
+the <acronym>HTML</acronym> manual. You should be able to change the value of some
+normal variables without a deep knowledge of <code>perl</code>, by looking
+at the existing examples. The possible mistakes in that case could be
+omitted <samp>`;'</samp>, and bad quoting.
+</p>
+<p>Initialization file are loaded from the main program by
+the mean of a <code>require</code>, while in the <code>Texi2HTML::Config</code>
+namespace. This means that the namespace of the main program and
+the namespace of inititalization files are distinct, which ensures
+that no name clash should happen. The variables are declared with the
+<code>our</code> specifier, such that it should be possible to use the
+<code>use strict</code> pragma in the initialization file code.
+</p>
+<p>To avoid messing with the variables in the <code>main</code> namespace
+all the global variables which could be of use in the init files
+are in the <code>Texi2HTML</code> namespace. Notice that the functions
+of the main program are still in the <code>main</code> namespace.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC15">5.1 Redefining functions in initialization files</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Function redefinition is achieved with
+ redefinition of references on functions.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC16">5.2 Conventions used for function prototypes</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Conventions used in that manual for function
+ reference prototypes display.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Redefining-functions"></a>
+<a name="SEC15"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC16" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 5.1 Redefining functions in initialization files </h2>
+
+<p>To redefine a function you must replace the corresponding funtion
+reference with a reference on your function.
+Thus you should write your function, give it a name you
+are certain it is unique in the <code>Texi2HTML::Config</code> namespace,
+and override the value of the function reference with your own
+function reference. When another function from the main program
+(or from another functions of an initialization file) calls the reference,
+your function will be used.
+</p>
+<p>For example the function
+reference corresponding with the function called when doing an
+anchor is called <a name="IDX73"></a>
+<code>$anchor</code>. Thus if you want to override the
+corresponding function
+you could write:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example"># override the function reference
+$anchor = \&amp;my_own_function;
+
+# the function reference now refers to
+sub my_own_function {
+# process arguments and return an html anchor
+}
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Function-prototypes"></a>
+<a name="SEC16"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC15" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 5.2 Conventions used for function prototypes </h2>
+
+<p>As the functions are defined by a reference name, we will always
+use the reference name in function prototypes. For the function arguments
+we will use <code>\@array</code> for a reference on an array and similarly
+<code>\%hash</code> for a reference on a hash.
+</p>
+<p>Thus, the prototype for the function associated with the function
+reference <samp>`$formatting_function'</samp> will be:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $text <b>formatting_function</b><i> $arg1 \@arg2</i>
+<a name="IDX74"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><code>formatting_function</code> takes as first argument <var>$arg2</var>,
+as second argument a reference on an array <var>\@arg2</var>
+and returns the formatted text <var>$text</var>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>To redefined the corresponding function, you should write:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$formatting_function = \&amp;my_formatting_function
+
+sub my_formatting_function($ $)
+{
+ my $arg1 = shift;
+ my $arg2 = shift;
+ # prepare $formatted_text
+ .....
+ return $formatted_text
+}
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Changing-the-page-layout"></a>
+<a name="SEC17"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC16" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC18" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC14" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 6. Fine tuning of the page layout </h1>
+
+<p>Some features of the page layout might be specified with command line
+options, the corresponding variables are described in
+<a href="#SEC10">Page layout related command line options</a>.
+Fine tuning of the page layout may be achieved
+with redefinition of other variables and function references in the
+initialization files.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC18">6.1 The different categories of pages and sectioning elements</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> The different categories of pages.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC19">6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> The elements of a page.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC21">6.3 Customization of the navigation panels buttons</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> How to change the navigation panel.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC25">6.4 Main program variables and usefull functions</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> The available main program variables and some
+ usefull functions from the main program.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC32">6.5 Preparing the output</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Setting variables before the document
+ production but after the texinfo parsing.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC33">6.6 Finalizing the output</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Cleaning after document generation.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Customizing css lines.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC36">6.9 Customizing the sections</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC38">6.11 Special pages formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Customizing table of contents, top, about page.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC45">6.12 Customizing the file names</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC46">6.13 Generation of external files for index entries</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Putting index entries in external files.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="The-different-pages"></a>
+<a name="SEC18"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC19" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.1 The different categories of pages and sectioning elements </h2>
+
+<p>The following sectioning elements can be associated with pages:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <em>Normal elements</em></dt>
+<dd><p>These are normal sections or nodes. Their association with pages is
+determined by the splitting of the document. See section <a href="#SEC6">Specifying where to split the generated document</a>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Top element</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The top element is the higher element in the document structure.
+If there is a <code>@top</code> section it is the element associated with
+that section. Otherwise it is the element associated with the
+<code>@node Top</code>. If there is no <code>@node Top</code> the first element is the
+top element.
+</p>
+<p>The top element is formatted differently than a normal element if there
+is a <code>@top</code> section or the <code>@node Top</code> isn't associated
+with a sectioning command.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Misc elements</em></dt>
+<dd><p>These elements are associated with pages if the document is split.
+There are four misc elements:
+</p><ol>
+<li> Table of contents
+</li><li> Short table of contents, also called Overview
+</li><li> Footnotes page
+</li><li> About page
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>The <em>About page</em> shouldn't be present for documents consisting
+in only one sectioning element. The <em>Footnote page</em> should only
+be present if the footnotes appear on a separated page
+(see section <a href="#SEC10">Page layout related command line options</a>), however a footnote element is present if
+the document isn't split. The <em>Table of contents</em> should only
+be formatted if <code>@contents</code> is present in the document.
+Similarly the <em>Overview</em> should only appear if <code>@shortcontents</code>
+or <code>@summarycontents</code> is present.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="The-page-layout"></a>
+<a name="SEC19"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC18" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC21" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview </h2>
+
+<p>A page is broken up in three parts. A page header, the sections
+and a page footer. A common element in the page layout is a navigation
+panel with icons or text linking to other sections or pages. Another
+common element is a rule, separating sections or footer. The navigation
+panel and the rules may be part of the sections or part of headers or
+footers. You may use the variables <a name="IDX75"></a>
+<code>$SMALL_RULE</code>,
+<a name="IDX76"></a>
+<code>$DEFAULT_RULE</code>, <a name="IDX77"></a>
+<code>$MIDDLE_RULE</code> and <a name="IDX78"></a>
+<code>$BIG_RULE</code>
+for rules of different sizes.
+The defaults are
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$SMALL_RULE = '&lt;hr size=&quot;1&quot;&gt;';
+$DEFAULT_RULE = '&lt;hr&gt;';
+$MIDDLE_RULE = '&lt;hr size=&quot;2&quot;&gt;';
+$BIG_RULE = '&lt;hr size=&quot;6&quot;&gt;';
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+
+<p>In the header some important meta data may be defined, like the
+title or style information, and textual informations may be present
+in comments. All this doesn't appear directly in the displayed
+<acronym>HTML</acronym>, though.
+</p>
+<p>The page layout is mainly controlled by functions, the precise functions
+called depending on the document splitting. The navigation panel, however,
+can be customized with variables.
+</p>
+<a name="SEC20"></a>
+<h3 class="subheading"> Element labels </h3>
+<p><a name="Element-labels"></a>
+</p>
+<p>There are 19 items associated with elements. Each of these
+is associated with a name and a reference to the
+element they represent, when such an element exists.
+The element is either a global element or an element relative to the current
+element. The relative elements are found with respect with the document
+structure defined by the section structuring commands (<code>@chapter</code>,
+<code>@unnumbered</code>&hellip;) or by the nodes (in that case the node
+directions are specified on node line or in menu organization).
+These items are called <em>element labels</em>. They may be associated with
+a button (see section <a href="#SEC23">Specifying the buttons formatting</a>), and used in the formatting functions
+(see section <a href="#SEC25">Main program variables and usefull functions</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here is the list:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <em><samp>`&nbsp;'</samp></em></dt>
+<dd><p>An empty button
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Top</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Top element. The associated name is <a name="IDX79"></a>
+<code>$TOP_HEADING</code> if that variable is
+defined. This variable is not set by default.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Contents</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Table of contents
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>About</em></dt>
+<dd><p>About (help) page
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Overview</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Overview, short table of contents
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>First</em></dt>
+<dd><p>First element in reading order
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Last</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Last element in reading order
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Index</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The first chapter with <code>@printindex</code>. The associated name
+is <a name="IDX80"></a>
+<code>$INDEX_CHAPTER</code>, if the variable is set. This variable is not set
+by default.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>This</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The current element
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Back</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Preceding element in reading order
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>FastBack</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter if the element is a chapter
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Prev</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Previous section on the same level
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>NodePrev</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Previous node
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Forward</em> </dt>
+<dd><p>Next element in reading order
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>FastForward</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Next chapter
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Next</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Next section on the same level
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>NodeNext</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Next node
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Following</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Next node in node reading order
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>Up</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Up section
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>NodeUp</em></dt>
+<dd><p>Up node
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Navigation-panel"></a>
+<a name="SEC21"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC19" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC22" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.3 Customization of the navigation panels buttons </h2>
+
+<p>A lot of customization of the navigation panel may be achieved without
+redefining functions, with variables redefinition.
+In case it isn't enough, it is also possible to redefine the function
+doing the navigation panel formatting.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC22">6.3.1 Controlling the navigation panel panel at a high level</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Variables controlling the navigation panel
+ at a global level
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC24">6.3.3 Changing the navigation panel formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="General-purpose-variables"></a>
+<a name="SEC22"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC21" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC23" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC21" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.3.1 Controlling the navigation panel panel at a high level </h3>
+
+<p>The global formatting of the navigation panels may be
+changed with the following variables:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>$VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION</code>
+<a name="IDX81"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>A vertical navigation panel will be used for the header navigation
+panel if this variable is true.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$ICONS</code>
+<a name="IDX82"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Icons are used instead of
+textual buttons if this variable is true.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$SECTION_NAVIGATION</code>
+<a name="IDX83"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>If this variable is false there is no section navigation, no navigation
+panels for the elements within the pages, only at
+the beginning and the end of the page (see section <a href="#SEC10">Page layout related command line options</a>).
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Button-specifications"></a>
+<a name="SEC23"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC22" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC24" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC21" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting </h3>
+
+<p>Several arrays and hashes enable a precise control on the buttons and
+their display.
+The following arrays determine the buttons present in navigation panels:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>@SECTION_BUTTONS</code>
+<a name="IDX84"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This array is used for the navigation panel buttons present at the begining
+of sectioning elements. If split at node or section they are also used
+at the page footer, and in the case of section navigation at the page header.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>@SECTION_FOOTER_BUTTONS</code>
+<a name="IDX85"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt> <code>@NODE_FOOTER_BUTTONS</code>
+<a name="IDX86"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This array is used for the navigation panel buttons present at the footer
+of pages when split at node or at section.
+</p>
+<p>If <a name="IDX87"></a>
+<code>$WORDS_IN_PAGE</code> is set and the output is split at nodes, these
+buttons are only present if there are more than <a name="IDX88"></a>
+<code>$WORDS_IN_PAGE</code>
+words in the sectioning element text. This counting is very rough and include
+punctuation marks, html elements, numbers. The default is to include the
+buttons after 300 words.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>@CHAPTER_BUTTONS</code>
+<a name="IDX89"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This array is used for the buttons appearing at the page footer if split at
+chapter, and at the page header if split at chapter and there is no section
+navigation.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>@MISC_BUTTONS</code>
+<a name="IDX90"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>These buttons appear at the beginning of special and sections
+and at the end of these section pages if the output is split.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The array specify the buttons displayed in navigation panels,
+and how the button is displayed.
+Each element is associated with
+a button of the navigation panel from left to right.
+The signification of the array element value is the following:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <em>reference on a function</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The function is called with first argument a filehandle reference on the
+current file and second argument a boolean true if the navigation
+panel should be vertical.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>reference on a scalar</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The scalar value is printed. For some possibly
+usefull scalars, <a href="#SEC26">Accessing elements informations</a>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>reference on an array</em></dt>
+<dd><p>In this case the first array element should be a reference on text and the
+second element an element label. In that case a link to the
+element associated with the element label with the scalar value
+text is generated.
+</p>
+<p>For example if the buttons array element is
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">[ 'Next', \$Texi2HTML::NODE{Next} ]
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The button will be a link to the next section with text
+<a name="IDX91"></a>
+<code>$Texi2HTML::NODE{Next}</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <em>element label</em></dt>
+<dd><p>If icons are not used, the button is a link to the corresponding
+element which text is defined by the value associated with the
+element label in the <a name="IDX92"></a>
+<code>%NAVIGATION_TEXT</code> hash, surrounded
+by <samp>`['</samp> and <samp>`]'</samp>. If the element label is <samp>` '</samp>, there is
+no <samp>`['</samp> and <samp>`]'</samp>.
+The element of the <code>%NAVIGATION_TEXT</code> hash are defined
+dynamically, in the <code>init_out</code> function reference
+(see section <a href="#SEC32">Preparing the output</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If icons are used, the button is an image with file determined by
+the value associated with the element label in the <a name="IDX93"></a>
+<code>%ACTIVE_ICONS</code>
+hash if the the link really leads to an element, or in the <a name="IDX94"></a>
+<code>%PASSIVE_ICONS</code>
+hash if there is no element to link to. Of course if there is a link to the
+element the icon links to that element.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Panel-formatting-function"></a>
+<a name="SEC24"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC23" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC25" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC21" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.3.3 Changing the navigation panel formatting </h3>
+
+<p>If you are not satisfied with this scheme, it is possible to
+control exactly the formatting of navigation panels by redefining a function
+reference. The function controlling the display of navigation panel is
+associated with the following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_navigation</b><i> $filehandle \@buttons $vertical</i>
+<a name="IDX95"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>\@buttons</var> is an array reference which should hold the specification of
+the buttons for that navigation panel. <var>$vertical</var> is true if the
+navigation panel should be vertical.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Program-variables"></a>
+<a name="SEC25"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC24" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC26" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.4 Main program variables and usefull functions </h2>
+
+<p>In the functions
+controlling the page layout some global variables set by the main
+program are available, with value corresponding with the current
+layout element.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC26">6.4.1 Accessing elements informations</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Accessing information related with the
+ different elements
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC27">6.4.2 Accessing global informations</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Accessing global informations, like date,
+ title&hellip;
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC31">6.4.3 Function usefull in page formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> main program usefull functions
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Elements-hashes"></a>
+<a name="SEC26"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC25" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC27" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC25" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.4.1 Accessing elements informations </h3>
+
+<p>Four hashes are available, with key the elements labels (as described
+in <a href="#Element-labels">Element labels</a>) and values:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>%Texi2HTML::NAME</code>
+<a name="IDX96"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The formatted element name
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>%Texi2HTML::HREF</code>
+<a name="IDX97"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The element hypertext reference
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>%Texi2HTML::NODE</code>
+<a name="IDX98"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The element node name
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>%Texi2HTML::NO_TEXI</code>
+<a name="IDX99"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The element name after removal of texi commands
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Global-informations"></a>
+<a name="SEC27"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC26" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC31" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC25" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.4.2 Accessing global informations </h3>
+
+<p>Three kinds of global informations are available, miscalleneous global
+strings, flags set by <code>@set</code> and special flags and section lines.
+</p>
+<a name="SEC28"></a>
+<h4 class="subsubheading"> Global strings </h4>
+<p>The <a name="IDX100"></a>
+<code>%Texi2HTML::THISDOC</code> hash holds some global informations:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>fulltitle</code></dt>
+<dd><p>title set by <code>@title</code>. If there is no <code>@title</code> other
+possibilities are tried (<code>@settitle</code>, <code>@shorttitlepage</code>&hellip;).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>title</code></dt>
+<dd><p>title set by <code>@settitle</code>, or <code>fulltitle</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>title_no_texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>title without texi formatting
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>title_texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>title with texi commands
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>author</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Authors list set by <code>@author</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>authors</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A reference on an array containing each author set by <code>@author</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>copying</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Text appearing in <code>@copying</code> with all the texinfo commands removed,
+put in comments.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>program</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The name and version of <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>program_homepage</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Homepage for <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>program_authors</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Authors of <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>file_base_name</code></dt>
+<dd><p>base name of the texinfo manual file.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>destination_directory</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Destination directory for the resulting files.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>toc_file</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The file name of the table of contents.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>today</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The date.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>It also holds the arg of the following commands, associated with the command
+name: kbdinputstyle, paragraphindent, setchapternewpage, headings,
+footnotestyle,
+ exampleindent, firstparagraphindent, everyheading, everyfooting,
+ evenheading, evenfooting, oddheading, oddfooting.
+</p>
+
+<a name="SEC29"></a>
+<h4 class="subsubheading"> Flags </h4>
+<p>Flags defined by <code>@set</code> may be accessed through the
+<a name="IDX101"></a>
+<code>%main::value</code> hash. The key is the flag name, the value is the
+flag value at the end of the document.
+</p>
+<p>Special flags are set by the main program. They correspond with a texinfo
+command, like <code>@setfilename</code>, or <code>@settitle</code>,
+<code>@author</code>&hellip; The corresponding flag is the command name with
+<samp>`_'</samp> appended, for example, <code>_titlefont</code> corresponds with
+<code>@titlefont</code>. Like other flags they are available in
+<a name="IDX102"></a>
+<code>%main::value</code>.
+</p>
+
+<a name="SEC30"></a>
+<h4 class="subsubheading"> Section lines </h4>
+
+<p>The following array references or arrays holds formatted lines:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>$Texi2HTML::THIS_SECTION</code>
+<a name="IDX103"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Lines of the current element.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$Texi2HTML::THIS_HEADER</code>
+<a name="IDX104"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Lines of the current element appearing before the element label (anchors).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$Texi2HTML::OVERVIEW</code>
+<a name="IDX105"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Lines of short table of contents. See section <a href="#SEC38">Special pages formatting</a>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$Texi2HTML::TOC_LINES</code>
+<a name="IDX106"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Lines of table of contents. See section <a href="#SEC38">Special pages formatting</a>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Global-functions"></a>
+<a name="SEC31"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC27" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC32" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC25" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.4.3 Function usefull in page formatting </h3>
+
+<p>The usefull function is a function used to print an array of lines, which
+also counts the number of words in the array, if needed.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function:</u> $words_number <b>main::print_lines</b><i> $filehandle \@lines_array</i>
+<a name="IDX107"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>\@lines_array</var> is the array line the function should write to the file.
+If this argument is omitted, the function uses <a name="IDX108"></a>
+<code>$Texi2HTML::THIS_SECTION</code>.
+<var>$words_number</var> is the number of words in the array, only defined if
+split at nodes and <a name="IDX109"></a>
+<code>$WORDS_IN_PAGE</code> is defined.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Output-initialization"></a>
+<a name="SEC32"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC31" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC33" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.5 Preparing the output </h2>
+
+<p>After the texinfo file has been parsed, some information is available
+which can be used to modify some variables and prepare the outputting.
+For example the document language, the document encoding,
+values set with <code>@set</code> or <code>@setfilename</code> and other similar
+@-commands are not known before the texinfo parsing.
+</p>
+<p>The following function reference may be redefined to be called after
+texinfo processing and before document generation:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $encoding <b>init_out</b>
+<a name="IDX110"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function perform the initialization of variables and any other
+task before document outputting. It returns the encoding used for the
+output files.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>In the default case the <a name="IDX111"></a>
+<code>$BODYTEXT</code> (see section <a href="#SEC35">Customizing the page header</a>)
+and the hashes <a name="IDX112"></a>
+<code>%NAVIGATION_TEXT</code> (see section <a href="#SEC23">Specifying the buttons formatting</a>) and
+<a name="IDX113"></a>
+<code>%BUTTONS_GOTO</code> (see section <a href="#SEC43">Formatting of about text</a>) are initialized.
+</p>
+<p>To perform the default initializations and also add more code, you could
+do as in the following example (save the default function reference and call
+it in your own function) :
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">my $default_init_out = $init_out;
+$init_out = \&amp;makeinfo_like_init_out;
+sub makeinfo_like_init_out()
+{
+ my $encoding = &amp;$default_init_out();
+ $NAVIGATION_TEXT{'Following'} = ' &amp;gt; ';
+ return $encoding;
+}
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Output-finalization"></a>
+<a name="SEC33"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC32" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC34" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.6 Finalizing the output </h2>
+
+<p>If you want to do some cleaning after the document was generated (close
+files, write at the end of files and so on), the following function
+reference may be redefined:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>finish_out</b>
+<a name="IDX114"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is called after the document generation.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The default is to do nothing.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="css"></a>
+<a name="SEC34"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC33" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC35" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines </h2>
+
+<p>It is possible to modify the <code>texi2html</code> css lines by modifying
+the entries or adding to the <a name="IDX115"></a>
+<code>%css_map</code> hash. Each key is a css
+selector, the corresponding value is a style string.
+</p>
+<p>The whole css text is in the variable <a name="IDX116"></a>
+<code>$CSS_LINES</code>. If this
+variable is defined the variable value is used instead of being
+constructed using the <a name="IDX117"></a>
+<code>%css_map</code> entries. For example if you don't
+want any css entries, set
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$CSS_LINES = '';
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>It is also possible to change completely the way <a name="IDX118"></a>
+<code>$CSS_LINES</code> are
+generated by redefining the following function reference:
+</p>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>css_lines</b><i> \@import_lines \@rule_lines</i>
+<a name="IDX119"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function should be used to construct the <a name="IDX120"></a>
+<code>$CSS_LINES</code>.
+<var>\@import_lines</var> are the <code>@import</code> lines of the
+files specified with <a name="IDX121"></a>
+<samp>`--include-css'</samp>,
+and <var>\@rule_lines</var> are the css commands lines of these files.
+See section <a href="#SEC11">Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Customizing-header"></a>
+<a name="SEC35"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC34" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC36" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.8 Customizing the page header </h2>
+
+<p>It is possible to add lines to the text within the <code>&lt;head&gt;</code>
+<acronym>HTML</acronym> elements, by defining the variable <a name="IDX122"></a>
+<code>$EXTRA_HEAD</code>.
+Similarly it is possible to add text just after the <code>&lt;body&gt;</code>
+element with the variable <a name="IDX123"></a>
+<code>$AFTER_BODY_OPEN</code>.
+These variables are empty by default.
+</p>
+<p>The encoding of the texinfo file is defined by <a name="IDX124"></a>
+<code>$DOCUMENT_ENCODING</code>
+if no <code>@documentencoding</code> appears in the document.
+The default is a <samp>`en-ascii'</samp> encoding.
+The encoding of the resulting document is defined by
+<a name="IDX125"></a>
+<code>$ENCODING</code>. The default is the <code>$DOCUMENT_ENCODING</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The description of the document may be specified in
+<a name="IDX126"></a>
+<code>$DOCUMENT_DESCRIPTION</code>. If this variable is undef, the text
+associated with <code>@documentdescription</code> is used, and if there isn't
+such test a default description is constructed using the document title and
+the name of the first section of the file.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>&lt;body&gt;</code> element attributes may be set by defining the
+variable <a name="IDX127"></a>
+<code>$BODYTEXT</code>. If you want to define that variable
+dynamically, you should use the <code>init_out</code> function reference
+(see section <a href="#SEC32">Preparing the output</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The default functions call the function associated with
+<a name="IDX128"></a>
+<code>$print_head_navigation</code> to format the navigation panel for the
+page header. Thus you can control parts of the formatting by
+redefining the function reference.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_head_navigation</b><i> $filehandle \@buttons</i>
+<a name="IDX129"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>\@buttons</var> is an array reference which should hold the specification of
+the buttons for the navigation panel.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>If you want even more control, you can have full control over the page header
+formatting by redefining three function references. The function associated
+with <a name="IDX130"></a>
+<code>$print_page_head</code> is called for all the pages, and after that,
+the function associated with <a name="IDX131"></a>
+<code>$print_chapter_header</code> is called
+if the document is split at chapters, or the function associated with
+<a name="IDX132"></a>
+<code>$print_section_header</code> is called if the document is split at sections.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_page_head</b><i> $filehandle</i>
+<a name="IDX133"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+This function should print the page head, including the <code>&lt;body&gt;</code>
+element.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_chapter_header</b><i> $filehandle</i>
+<a name="IDX134"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+This function is called if the document is split at chapters, after
+<code>print_page_head</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_section_header</b><i> $filehandle</i>
+<a name="IDX135"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+This function is called if the document is split at sections, after
+<code>print_page_head</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Customizing-section"></a>
+<a name="SEC36"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC35" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC37" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.9 Customizing the sections </h2>
+
+<p>The functions associated with the following function references are used for
+the formatting of sections:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_section</b><i> $filehandle $first_in_page $previous_is_top</i>
+<a name="IDX136"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>$first_in_page</var> is true if this section is the first section in the page.
+<var>$previous_is_top</var> is true if this section is the section following the
+Top section.
+This function should print the current section.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>end_section</b><i> $filehandle $last_element_or_before_top</i>
+<a name="IDX137"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>$last_element_or_before_top</var> is true if this section precedes the top
+element or is the last one in page, or before the special elements.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Customizing-footer"></a>
+<a name="SEC37"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC36" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC38" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.10 Customizing the page footer </h2>
+
+<p>It is possible to add text just before the <code>&lt;/body&gt;</code>
+element with the variable <a name="IDX138"></a>
+<code>$PRE_BODY_CLOSE</code>. Nothing is added
+by default.
+</p>
+
+<p>The default functions call the function associated with
+<a name="IDX139"></a>
+<code>$print_foot_navigation</code> to format the navigation panel for the
+page footer. Thus you can control parts of the formatting by
+redefining the function reference.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_foot_navigation</b><i> $filehandle \@buttons</i>
+<a name="IDX140"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>\@buttons</var> is an array reference which should hold the specification of
+the buttons for the navigation panel.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>If you want even more control, you can have full control the page footer
+formatting by redefining three function references.
+The function associated with <a name="IDX141"></a>
+<code>$print_chapter_footer</code> is called
+if the document is split at chapters, or the function associated with
+<a name="IDX142"></a>
+<code>$print_section_footer</code> is called if the document is split at sections.
+ After that the function associated
+with <a name="IDX143"></a>
+<code>$print_page_foot</code> is called.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_page_foot</b><i> $filehandle</i>
+<a name="IDX144"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+This function should print the page foot, including the <code>&lt;/body&gt;</code>
+element.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_chapter_footer</b><i> $filehandle</i>
+<a name="IDX145"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+This function is called if the document is split at chapters, before
+<code>print_page_foot</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_section_footer</b><i> $filehandle</i>
+<a name="IDX146"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+This function is called if the document is split at sections, before
+<code>print_page_foot</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Special-pages"></a>
+<a name="SEC38"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC37" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC39" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.11 Special pages formatting </h2>
+
+<p>For the special elements, two things must be formatted: the content
+and the page layout
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC39">6.11.1 Customizing the content of the special pages</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Special-pages-content"></a>
+<a name="SEC39"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC38" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC40" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC38" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.11.1 Customizing the content of the special pages </h3>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC40">6.11.1.1 Top element text formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC42">6.11.1.3 Formatting of footnotes text</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC43">6.11.1.4 Formatting of about text</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Top-element-text"></a>
+<a name="SEC40"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC39" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC41" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC39" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h4 class="subsubsection"> 6.11.1.1 Top element text formatting </h4>
+<p>The top element formatting is controlled by three function which also
+controls the layout of the top element page or section. The associated
+function references are:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_Top_header</b><i> $filehandle $begin_page</i>
+<a name="IDX147"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>$begin_page</var> is true if the element is the first in a page.
+This function should begin the Top element. At the time this function is called
+the top element text hasn't been parsed.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_Top</b><i> $filehandle $has_top_heading</i>
+<a name="IDX148"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>$has_top_heading</var> is true if there is a <code>@heading</code> command or
+<code>@titlefont</code> command appearing in the Top element text.
+This function should be used to format the Top element text and navigation
+panel.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>print_Top_footer</b><i> $filehandle $end_page</i>
+<a name="IDX149"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$filehandle</var> is the opened filehandle the function should write to.
+<var>$end_page</var> is true if the element is the last in a page.
+This function should end the Top element.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Contents-and-Overview-text"></a>
+<a name="SEC41"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC40" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC42" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC39" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h4 class="subsubsection"> 6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents </h4>
+<p>Several variables may be used to control the formatting of table of contents
+and short table of contents:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>$DO_CONTENTS</code>
+<a name="IDX150"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>If the variable is true a table of contents is done even if there is no
+<code>@contents</code> command.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$DO_SCONTENTS</code>
+<a name="IDX151"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>If the variable is true a short table of contents is done even if there is no
+<code>@summarycontents</code> command.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$BEFORE_OVERVIEW</code>
+<a name="IDX152"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The variable value is inserted before the short table of contents text.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$AFTER_OVERVIEW</code>
+<a name="IDX153"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The variable value is inserted after the short table of contents text.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$BEFORE_TOC_LINES</code>
+<a name="IDX154"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The variable value is inserted before the table of contents text.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$AFTER_TOC_LINES</code>
+<a name="IDX155"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The variable value is inserted after the table of contents text.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$TOC_LIST_STYLE</code>
+<a name="IDX156"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This should contain a css style used for the list style if the tables of
+content are formatted with a list.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$TOC_LIST_ATTRIBUTE</code>
+<a name="IDX157"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This should contain an attribute text used for the list element if the tables of
+content are formatted with a list.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>More control on the table of contents and short table of contents formatting
+may be achieved by redefining a function with the following associated
+function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>toc_body</b><i> \@elements </i>
+<a name="IDX158"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>\@elements</var> is an array reference contining informations about
+all the elements of the document. Each of the entry of this array is an hash
+reference which entries correspond with different informations
+about the element. Interesting keys have the following meaning:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>top</code></dt>
+<dd><p>true if the element is the top element,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>index_page</code></dt>
+<dd><p>true if the element is an index page added because of index splitting,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>toc_level</code></dt>
+<dd><p>level of the element in the table of content. Highest level
+is 1 for the top element and for chapters, appendix and so on,
+2 for section, unnumberedsec and so on...
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>tocid</code></dt>
+<dd><p>label used for reference linking to the element in table of
+contents,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>file</code> </dt>
+<dd><p>the file containing the element, usefull to do href to that file
+in case the document is split,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>text</code></dt>
+<dd><p>text of the element, with section number,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>name</code></dt>
+<dd><p>text of the element, without section number.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>This function doesn't return anything but should fill the array corresponding
+with the
+<a name="IDX159"></a>
+<code>$Texi2HTML::TOC_LINES</code> and
+<a name="IDX160"></a>
+<code>$Texi2HTML::OVERVIEW</code> references with the table of contents and short
+table of contents.
+</p>
+</dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Footnotes-text"></a>
+<a name="SEC42"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC41" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC43" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC39" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h4 class="subsubsection"> 6.11.1.3 Formatting of footnotes text </h4>
+
+<p>The footnotes text is allready formatting when <code>@footnote</code> commands
+are expanded. See section <a href="#SEC82">Customizing the footnotes formatting</a>.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="About-text"></a>
+<a name="SEC43"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC42" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC44" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC39" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h4 class="subsubsection"> 6.11.1.4 Formatting of about text </h4>
+
+<p>The default about element contains an explaination of the buttons used
+in the document (<code>@SECTION_BUTTONS</code>, <a href="#SEC23">Specifying the buttons formatting</a>) and
+an example locating the buttons targets in an example.
+The formatting of this text may be influenced by the following
+hashes and variables:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>$PRE_ABOUT</code> </dt>
+<dt> <code>$AFTER_ABOUT</code></dt>
+<dd><p>This variable may be a scalar or a function reference.
+If it is a scalar, the value is used.
+If this is a function reference it is expanded and the returned text is
+used. The text is added before or after the main about text.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>%BUTTONS_GOTO</code></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The keys of this hash are element labels (see <a href="#Element-labels">Element labels</a>). The value
+is the text associated with the element label in the about text.
+The element of the hash are defined
+dynamically, you should in the <code>init_out</code> function reference
+(see section <a href="#SEC32">Preparing the output</a>).
+</p>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <code>%BUTTONS_EXAMPLE</code></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The keys of this hash are element labels (see <a href="#Element-labels">Element labels</a>). The value
+is the text associated with the element label in the about example,
+typically a section number.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>If this is not enough and you want to control exactly the formatting of
+the about text, you can redefine the function associated with the following
+function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $about_text <b>print_about</b>
+<a name="IDX161"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function should return the about text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Special-pages-layout"></a>
+<a name="SEC44"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC43" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC45" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC38" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages </h3>
+
+<p>The formatting of each of the special pages, or section in case
+the document is not split, is controlled by a function.
+The associated function reference is called accordingly:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>print_Top</code>
+<a name="IDX162"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt> <code>print_Top_header</code>
+<a name="IDX163"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt> <code>print_Top_footer</code>
+<a name="IDX164"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Formatting of top element page or section. It is also used for the formatting
+of the top element text (see section <a href="#SEC40">Top element text formatting</a>).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>print_Toc</code>
+<a name="IDX165"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Formatting of table of contents page or section
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>print_Overview</code>
+<a name="IDX166"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Formatting of short table of contents page or section
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>print_About</code>
+<a name="IDX167"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Formatting of about (help) page or section
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>print_Footnotes</code>
+<a name="IDX168"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Formatting of footnotes section or page in case footnotes are on a
+separated page or the document isn't split.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>In the default case, <a name="IDX169"></a>
+<code>$print_Top</code> calls <a name="IDX170"></a>
+<code>$print_Top_header</code> for
+the header and <a name="IDX171"></a>
+<code>$print_Top_footer</code> for the footer of top element.
+All the other function call <a name="IDX172"></a>
+<code>$print_misc</code> which in turn calls
+<a name="IDX173"></a>
+<code>$print_misc_header</code> for the headers and <a name="IDX174"></a>
+<code>$print_misc_footer</code>
+for the footers.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="File-names"></a>
+<a name="SEC45"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC44" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC46" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.12 Customizing the file names </h2>
+
+<p>It is possible to specify the file names with more control than with the
+command line options (see section <a href="#SEC7">Setting output file and directory names</a>).
+First the extension may be overrided by the variable <a name="IDX175"></a>
+<code>$EXTENSION</code>
+value.
+Two function references enable
+further customization. One is usefull in case <a name="IDX176"></a>
+<code>$NODE_FILES</code> is true
+and it is used to customize the node file name itself and is also used
+to produce a file name with a redirection leading to the node file.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> ($node_file $redirection_node_file) <b>node_file_name</b><i> $node</i>
+<a name="IDX177"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$node</var> is a hash reference with the following interesting keys (there
+are much more keys):
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The texinfo node name.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>with_section</code></dt>
+<dd><p>True if associated with a section.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+<p>The result is the node file name <var>$node_file</var>, and the file containing
+a redirection to the node <var>$redirection_node_file</var>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The other is usefull if <code>$NODE_FILES</code> isn't true. It is used to
+customize the file associated with each element.
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $file <b>element_file_name</b><i> $element $is_top $docu_name</i>
+<a name="IDX178"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$element</var> is a hash reference with the following interesting keys (there
+are much more keys):
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The texinfo element name.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>number</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The number associated with a section.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>doc_nr</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A number incremented whenever a new file should begin, based on how the
+document is split (see section <a href="#SEC6">Specifying where to split the generated document</a>).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>text</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The element text.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>name</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The element text without section number.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+<p><var>$is_top</var> is true if the element is considered as the top element.
+<var>$docu_name</var> is the basename of the texinfo manual.
+The result is the element file name.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="External-index-files"></a>
+<a name="SEC46"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC45" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 6.13 Generation of external files for index entries </h2>
+
+<p>Within the document, <code>@printindex</code> commands are expanded as explained
+in <a href="#SEC78">Customizing the formatting of index lists</a>. In case you want to do something special with index
+entries, outside of the document, you should first set the variable
+<a name="IDX179"></a>
+<code>$IDX_SUMMARY</code> true. After that some function reference will be called
+for each non empty index. For each index there are 3 function
+references, one called for initialization, one called for each index entry
+and the last one called for finalazation.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>index_summary_file_begin</b><i> $index_name $is_printed</i>
+<a name="IDX180"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$index_name</var> is the two letters name for the index.
+This function
+is called for each index
+appearing in the document, before
+<code>index_summary_file_entry</code>.
+<var>$is_printed</var> is true if there is a <code>@printindex</code> for that index.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>index_summary_file_entry</b><i> $index_name $entry_text $entry_reference $formatted_entry $texi_entry $entry_element_reference $entry_element_header $is_printed</i>
+<a name="IDX181"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is called for each entry of an index. <var>index_name</var> is the
+name of the index. <var>$entry_text</var> is the entry in plain text,
+<var>$formatted_entry</var> is the index entry formatted, <var>$texi_entry</var> is the
+entry with texinfo commands. <var>$entry_reference</var> is the reference placed
+at the index entry place, in the form <samp>`file#id'</samp>.
+<var>$entry_element_header</var> is the formatted header of the element containing
+the index entry. <var>entry_element_header</var> is the reference to the
+beginning of the element containing the index entry, in the form
+<samp>`file#id'</samp>.
+<var>$is_printed</var> is true if there is a <code>@printindex</code> for that index.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>index_summary_file_end</b><i> $index_name $is_printed</i>
+<a name="IDX182"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$index_name</var> is the two letters name for the index. This function
+is called for each index appearing in the document, after
+<code>index_summary_file_entry</code>.
+<var>$is_printed</var> is true if there is a <code>@printindex</code> for that index.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Customizing-HTML"></a>
+<a name="SEC47"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC46" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC48" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC17" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="chapter"> 7. Customizing <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style in init files </h1>
+
+<p>Some simple customization may be achieved with the redefinition of the
+variables
+associated with the command line options. For the description and an
+explanation of the meaning of these variables, <a href="#SEC11">Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a>.
+</p>
+<p>Other variables and hash entries can be modified in initialization file
+to achieve more customization.
+Lastly, functions references corresponding with functions called from
+the main program and initialization files may
+be redefined.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC48">7.1 Three contexts for expansions: preformatted, normal and string</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> there are three different contexts for command
+ expansion: normal text, preformatted text and
+ strings.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC50">7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC54">7.4 Formatting of special simple commands</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Formatting of <code>@anchor</code>, <code>@image</code>, <code>@sp</code>, <code>@acronym</code>, <code>@abbr</code>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC55">7.5 Processing special characters in text</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Some characters are processed specially
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC56">7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> <code>texi2html</code> write some strings in the output
+ different for each languages
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC57">7.7 References</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> <code>@center</code>, <code>@flushleft</code>&hellip;
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC61">7.9 Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC64">7.10 Formatting of complex formats (<code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;)</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> <code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC65">7.11 Customizing the formatting of lists and tables</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC68">7.12 Definition commands formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC71">7.13 Customizing headings formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC72">7.14 Formatting of special regions (<code>@verbatim</code>, <code>@cartouche</code>, <code>@quotation</code>)</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> <code>@verbatim</code>, <code>@cartouche</code>, <code>@quotation</code>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC73">7.15 Menu formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC76">7.16 Indices formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC79">7.17 Floats and lists of floats</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> <code>@float</code> and <code>@listoffloats</code>
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC82">7.18 Customizing the footnotes formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> You can handle specifically other commands
+</td></tr>
+<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">
+</pre></th></tr></table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Three-contexts"></a>
+<a name="SEC48"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC49" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.1 Three contexts for expansions: preformatted, normal and string </h2>
+
+<p>There are three contexts of interest, one is the normal context, the other
+is a special context, called the <em>preformatted</em> context and the last is
+the string context. The preformatted
+context occurs when the spacing between words is kept. This is the
+case, for example, in <code>@display</code> or <code>@example</code> regions, and in
+menu comments (see section <a href="#SEC73">Menu formatting</a>). The preformatted regions are usually
+rendered in <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> elements in <acronym>HTML</acronym>.
+The string context occurs when rendering strings without formatting elements,
+in comments or titles for example.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Commands-without-argument"></a>
+<a name="SEC49"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC48" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC50" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument </h2>
+
+<p>This includes the commands whose name is a nonletter character like <code>@@</code>,
+the commands with lettered characters and braces
+but whose braces should be empty, like <code>@TeX{}</code>, or some commands
+associated with accentted letters like <code>@AA{}</code>. If there happens to
+be something within the braces, it is put after the command, thus
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@TeX{something}
+</pre></td></tr></table><p>leads to the same than
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@TeX{} something
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>Each of these categories of commands have three associated hashes, one
+for normal
+context, the other for preformatted context and the last in strings. The
+keys of the hashes are the
+command names, the associated value is the text replacing the command.
+</p>
+<p>The hashes are:
+</p><table>
+<tr><td><p> command type </p></td><td><p> normal text </p></td><td><p> preformatted text </p></td><td><p> string
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td><p> one nonlettered character </p></td><td> <a name="IDX183"></a>
+<p><code>%simple_map</code> </p></td><td> <a name="IDX184"></a>
+<p><code>%simple_map_pre</code> </p></td><td> <a name="IDX185"></a>
+<p><code>%simple_map_texi</code>
+</p></td></tr>
+<tr><td><p> nothing in braces </p></td><td> <a name="IDX186"></a>
+<p><code>%things_map</code> </p></td><td> <a name="IDX187"></a>
+<p><code>%pre_map</code> </p></td><td> <a name="IDX188"></a>
+<p><code>%texi_map</code>
+</p></td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>To change the <acronym>HTML</acronym> resulting from these constructs, just change the
+value. For example, if you want <code>&amp;shy;</code> to be outputted for <code>@-</code>
+in normal and preformatted context, write in your init file:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$simple_map{'-'} = '&amp;shy;';
+$simple_map_pre{'-'} = '&amp;shy;';
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Style-and-accent-commands"></a>
+<a name="SEC50"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC49" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC51" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands </h2>
+
+<p>The formatting of the <acronym>HTML</acronym> produced by style and indicatric
+commands (<code>@tt</code>, <code>@code</code>,
+<code>@email</code>, <code>@titlefont</code>), the accentuation related
+commands taking argument (<code>@'</code>, <code>@udotaccent</code>, <code>@dotless</code>)
+and miscalleneous commands (<code>@email</code>, <code>@verb</code>, <code>@w</code>,
+<code>@uref</code>, <code>@math</code>, <code>@asis</code>) is controlled by two hash in the
+default case,
+<a name="IDX189"></a>
+<code>%style_map</code> for normal context, <a name="IDX190"></a>
+<code>%style_map_pre</code> for
+preformatted context and <a name="IDX191"></a>
+<code>%style_map_texi</code> in string context.
+</p>
+<p>The key of the hashes are the command names. There are two possibilities for
+the values corresponding with two interfaces. The values may be strings or
+hash references, and you can chose the interface depending on the one you
+prefer. The interface with hash reference is a bit more flexible but might also
+be regarded as more complex. If you don't like either of these interfaces you
+can define your own.
+</p>
+<p>Some remarks are in order:
+</p>
+<ul class="toc">
+<li>
+The nonlettered accent commands which following character is considered
+to be the argument (like in <code>@`a</code>) should be keys of the
+hash <a name="IDX192"></a>
+<code>%accent_map</code> hash, even if no value is associated.
+</li><li>
+<code>@math</code> is handled differently if LaTeX2HTML is used.
+</li></ul>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC51">7.3.1 An interface for commands formatting with a hash reference</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC52">7.3.2 An interface for commands formatting with a string</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC53">7.3.3 Defining the style and indicatric commands interface</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Hash-reference-interface"></a>
+<a name="SEC51"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC50" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC52" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC50" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.3.1 An interface for commands formatting with a hash reference </h3>
+
+<p>The key of the hashes are the command names. The value determine how the command argument
+is formatted. This value is a reference on a hash. In this hash each key
+corresponds with a type of information for the formatting, and the value is
+the corresponding information. For example, in
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$style_map{'command'} = { 'args' =&gt; ['code'], 'attribute' =&gt; 'code'};
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>the arguments for <code>@command</code> are interpreted as specified by
+the values associated with the <samp>`args'</samp> key while the attribute associated
+with that command is <samp>`code'</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>The following keys in the hashes associated with each command have the
+following meaning:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <samp>`args'</samp></dt>
+<dd><p><a name="Reference-hash-args"></a>
+The value associated is a reference on an array. Each element of the array
+defines how the arguments (separated by <samp>`,'</samp> in the texinfo code) for
+the @-command should be
+formatted. The possibilities are
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>normal</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for normal text,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>code</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for text with <samp>`---'</samp>, <samp>`--'</samp>, <samp>`'''</samp> and <samp>```'</samp> kept as is,
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>keep</code></dt>
+<dd><p>if the texinfo should be kept as is, without interpretation of the @-commands.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>For example, we have
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$style_map{'email'}-&gt;{'args'} = ['code', 'normal'];
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>because <samp>`---'</samp>, <samp>`--'</samp>, <samp>`'''</samp> and <samp>```'</samp> should be kept as is in
+the first argument of <code>@email</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The default is <samp>`['normal']'</samp>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <samp>`attribute'</samp></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>If the associated value is a word, it is considered to be an <acronym>HTML</acronym>
+element name, and the argument is enclosed between the element opening
+and the element closing. For example, if the value is <code>elem</code>, the
+resulting <acronym>HTML</acronym> is <code>&lt;elem&gt;<var>arg</var>&lt;/elem&gt;</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If the text is a word followed by some text,
+the word and is interpreted as above, and the
+text is considered to be the attributes text of the element.
+Thus <code>elem class=&quot;elem&quot;</code> leads to
+<code>&lt;elem class=&quot;elem&quot;&gt;<var>arg</var>&lt;/elem&gt;</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This works only if there is only one argument.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <samp>`begin'</samp></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The associated value is added in front of the text.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <samp>`begin'</samp></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The associated value is added after the text.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <samp>`quotes'</samp></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>If the corresponding value is true, the result is
+enclosed in quotes <a name="IDX193"></a>
+<code>$OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code> and
+<a name="IDX194"></a>
+<code>$CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code>, with defaults
+<samp>``'</samp> and <samp>`''</samp>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt> <samp>`function'</samp> </dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The corresponding value should be a function reference. The corresponding
+function is called with the following arguments:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>$command</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The @-command name
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$args</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A reference on an array containing the arguments of the @-command.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$style_stack</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A reference on an array containing the name of the @-commands containing
+the @-command being formatted.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$state</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A reference on a hash containing a lot of informations about the context
+of the @-command.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>$line_nr</code></dt>
+<dd><p>An opaque structure containing the information about the line number of the
+@-command. It can be used to call <code>main::echo_error</code> or
+<code>main::echo_warning</code> with first argument a message, and second argument
+<code>$line_nr</code>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="String-interface"></a>
+<a name="SEC52"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC51" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC53" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC50" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.3.2 An interface for commands formatting with a string </h3>
+
+<p>The keys of the hashes are the command names. The value determine
+how the command argument
+is formatted. If the value begins with <samp>`&quot;'</samp>, the result is
+enclosed in quotes <a name="IDX195"></a>
+<code>$OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code> and
+<a name="IDX196"></a>
+<code>$CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code>, with defaults
+<samp>``'</samp> and <samp>`''</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>The command argument is allready formatted as <acronym>HTML</acronym>.
+The remaining of the value text
+(or the value text if there were no <samp>`&quot;'</samp>) is interpreted as follow:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li>
+If the text is empty the argument of the command is left as is.
+</li><li>
+If the text is a <samp>`&amp;'</samp> followed by a name,
+like <samp>`&amp;function'</samp>, the name is considered to be a function name,
+and this function is called to format the argument of the command. The
+first argument of the function is the command name, the second is
+the command argument. For example, if the value associated with the
+(fictituous) command <code>@foo</code> is <code>&amp;my_func</code>
+and we have:
+
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">sub my_func
+{
+ my @args = split /,\s*/ $_[1];
+ return &quot;$_[0]: $args[0]&quot; if ($args[1] = 1);
+ return &quot;$args[0]&quot;;
+}
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The result of
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@foo{truc, 1}
+@foo{truc, bidule}
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>will be
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">foo: truc
+truc
+</pre></td></tr></table></li><li>
+If the text is a word, it is considered to be an <acronym>HTML</acronym> element
+name, and the argument is enclosed between the element opening
+and the element closing. For example, if the value is <code>elem</code>, the
+resulting <acronym>HTML</acronym> is <code>&lt;elem&gt;<var>arg</var>&lt;/elem&gt;</code>.
+Similarly <code>&quot;quoted</code> leads to
+<code>`&lt;quoted&gt;<var>arg</var>&lt;/quoted&gt;'</code>.
+</li><li>
+If the text is a word followed by some text,
+the word and is interpreted as above, and the
+text is considered to be the attributes text of the element.
+Thus <code>elem class=&quot;elem&quot;</code> leads to
+<code>&lt;elem class=&quot;elem&quot;&gt;<var>arg</var>&lt;/elem&gt;</code>.
+</li></ul>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Define-your-own-interface"></a>
+<a name="SEC53"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC52" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC54" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC50" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.3.3 Defining the style and indicatric commands interface </h3>
+
+<p>If you don't like this scheme, it is possible to change how those commands
+are processed by redefining the following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $resulting_text <b>style</b><i> $style $command $text $args $no_close $no_open $line_nr $state $style_stack</i>
+<a name="IDX197"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the @-command, <var>$style</var> is the value associated with
+the <var>$command</var> in the <code>%style_map</code>, <code>%style_map_pre</code>
+or <code>%style_map_texi</code> hashes.
+The <var>$text</var> is the text appearing within the @-command braces.
+<var>args</var> is a reference on an array contening the command arguments
+formatted according to the same conventions than with the reference hash style
+(provided the value associated with the @-command is a hash reference with a
+<var>$arg</var> key as described in <a href="#Reference-hash-args">Reference hash args</a>).
+If <var>$text</var> is split in paragraphs each paragraph is passed through
+the function, and <var>$no_close</var> is true if it is not the last paragraph,
+while <var>$no_open</var> is true if it is not the first paragraph.
+<var>$line_nr</var>
+is an opaque structure containing the information about the line number of the
+@-command. It can be used to call <code>main::echo_error</code> or
+<code>main::echo_warning</code> with first argument a message, and second argument
+<code>$line_nr</code>.
+<var>$state</var>
+is a reference on a hash containing a lot of informations about the context
+of the @-command.
+<var>$style_stack</var>
+is a reference on an array containing the name of the @-commands containing
+the @-command being formatted.
+</p>
+</dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Anchors-images-and-spaces"></a>
+<a name="SEC54"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC53" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC55" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.4 Formatting of special simple commands </h2>
+
+<p>The formatting of special simple commands is controlled by functions. To
+customize the output, the corresponding function references should be
+redefined. All these functions return a formatted text.
+</p>
+<p>The formatting of anchors is controlled by <a name="IDX198"></a>
+<code>$anchor</code>, but the function
+associated with the function reference does more, it is usefull
+to produce a reference target or link.
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $anchor <b>anchor</b><i> $identifier $href $text $attributes</i>
+<a name="IDX199"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>If <var>$identifier</var> is not empty, this value should be used to create
+a target for links (typically associated with a name or id
+attribute in <acronym>HTML</acronym>).
+The <var>$href</var> argument specifies a hpertextual reference which should be
+used to link to a target.
+In case both <var>$identifier</var> and <var>$href</var> are given the text produced
+should be both a target for <var>$identifier</var> and a link to <var>$href</var>.
+<var>$text</var> is the text to be displayed.
+<var>$attributes</var> are additional attributes.
+It should be reasonable to assume that the attributes are for a <code>&lt;a&gt;</code>
+<acronym>HTML</acronym> element.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The formatting of <code>@image</code> is controlled by:
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $image <b>image</b><i> $file_path $basename $preformatted $file_name</i>
+<a name="IDX200"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$file_path</var> is the image file name with the path, <var>$basename</var> is the
+alternate text or the file name without extension if no alternate text is
+given. <var>$preformatted</var> is true if the image
+appears in preformatted text. <var>$file_name</var> is the file name without path
+but with extension.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The formatting of <code>@sp</code> is controlled by:
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $sp <b>sp</b><i> $number $preformatted</i>
+<a name="IDX201"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$number</var> is the numeric argument of <code>@sp</code>.
+<var>$preformatted</var> is true if the <code>@sp</code> appears in preformatted text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The formatting of <code>@acronym</code> and <code>@abbr</code> is controlled by:
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $acronym <b>acronym_like</b><i> $acronym_texi $acronym_text $with_explanation \@explanation_lines $explanation_text $explanation_simply_formatted</i>
+<a name="IDX202"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$acronym_texi</var> is the acronym argument with texinfo @-commands,
+<var>$acronym_text</var> is formatted.
+</p>
+<p>The other arguments are related with
+the explanation, the second arg of the acronym. <var>$with_explanation</var> is
+true if the second argument of the acronym command is present. If an
+explanation exists, coming from previous <code>@acronym</code> or as an arg of this
+command, the other args are defined: <var>\@explanation_lines</var> is a
+reference on an array containing the unformatted explanation lines,
+<var>$explanation_text</var> is the explanation text formatted,
+<var>$explanation_simply_formatted</var> is the explanation with a light formatting,
+unabling in <acronym>HTML</acronym> (or <acronym>XML</acronym>) the explanation to be in an
+attribute.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Text"></a>
+<a name="SEC55"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC54" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC56" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.5 Processing special characters in text </h2>
+
+<p>Some characters are processed especially in text: <samp>`---'</samp>, <samp>`--'</samp>,
+<samp>```'</samp> and <samp>`'''</samp>. This is done only if in normal text and not in
+some commands (<code>@code</code>, <code>@env</code>&hellip;). A function reference
+is called to process those characters in text
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $processed_text <b>normal_text</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX203"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The function processes <samp>`---'</samp>, <samp>`--'</samp>, <samp>```'</samp> and <samp>`'''</samp>
+in <var>$text</var> and returns <var>$processed_text</var>. The default is to
+change <samp>`---'</samp> to <samp>`--'</samp>, <samp>`--'</samp> to <samp>`-'</samp>, and <samp>```'</samp> and
+<samp>`'''</samp> to <samp>`&quot;'</samp>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>Some characters are special in <acronym>HTML</acronym> (<samp>`&amp;'</samp>, <samp>`&quot;'</samp>,
+<samp>`&lt;'</samp> and <samp>`&gt;'</samp>) and should be protected.
+This is done by the function associated with the function reference
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $protected_text <b>protect_text</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX204"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The function processes the unprotected text <var>$text</var> and returns
+the resulting protected text <var>$protected_text</var>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>Empty lines are processed by the following function reference, which could
+be usefull if empty lines are to be removed for example
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $resulting_text <b>empty_line</b><i> $empty_line</i>
+<a name="IDX205"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function processes an <var>$empty_line</var> and returns the resulting
+text <var>$resulting_text</var>. Empty lines are left as is by default.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Strings"></a>
+<a name="SEC56"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC55" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC57" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code> </h2>
+
+
+<p><code>texi2html</code> writes some strings in the generated document at
+various places, at the page footers, on the help page, for special
+section headings, buttons alt text and so on. These strings are
+customizable. The string chosen depends on the language of the
+document (set by <a name="IDX206"></a>
+<samp>`--lang'</samp>, <a name="IDX207"></a>
+<code>$LANG</code> or
+<code>@documentlanguage</code>). This is the basis for internationalization
+as it allows for strings translations.
+</p>
+<p>The strings are found in a hash reference, <a name="IDX208"></a>
+<code>$LANGUAGES</code>.
+Each key is a language code. The associated value is also a hash
+reference. The key is an english string and the associated value
+is the string replacing the english string, if present. For example,
+we have
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$LANGUAGES-&gt;{'fr'} = {
+ ' Up ' =&gt; 'Plus haut',
+};
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>It means that whenever the string <samp>`&nbsp;Up&nbsp;'</samp> is to be written
+and the language is <samp>`fr'</samp>, <samp>`Plus haut'</samp> is written. It is possible
+to customize the english strings by redefining the <samp>`en'</samp> language hash.
+</p>
+<p>When a string contains a <samp>`%'</samp> followed by <samp>`{'</samp> <var>name</var> <samp>`}'</samp>
+it means that the string will be expanded by <code>texi2html</code>. For
+example, if we have
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$LANGUAGES-&gt;{'fr'} = {
+ 'See %{node_file_href}' =&gt; 'Voir %{node_file_href}',
+};
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p><samp>`%{node_file_href}'</samp> will be expanded to an href for a node in a
+file by <code>texi2html</code> in the string. A <samp>`%%'</samp> will be expanded
+as <samp>`%'</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>For more on internationalization, see <a href="#SEC84">Internationalization</a>.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="References"></a>
+<a name="SEC57"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC56" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC58" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.7 References </h2>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC58">7.7.1 Reference to external manual</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC59">7.7.2 Reference to an internal node</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Reference-to-external-manual"></a>
+<a name="SEC58"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC57" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC59" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC57" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.7.1 Reference to external manual </h3>
+
+<p>The references are produced with two function references, one for the
+hypertextual reference construction, the other for the full reference to
+external manual.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $href <b>external_href</b><i> $node $node_identifier $xml_node_identifier $manual_file_name</i>
+<a name="IDX209"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$node</var> is the node name, with @-commands. <var>$node_identifer</var> is the
+node name mapped to an identifier acceptable as a file name.
+<var>$xml_node_identifier</var> is the
+node name mapped to an identifier acceptable as an <acronym>XML</acronym> identifier.
+Those identifiers are built as explained in <a href="texinfo.html#HTML-Xref">(texinfo)HTML Xref</a>,
+thus allowing for cross references to external manuals. <var>$file</var> is the
+manual or file name of the external reference. This function should return an
+href leading to the external manual.
+</p>
+<p>The default for this function is to make a reference compatible with
+<code>makeinfo</code> (see <a href="texinfo.html#HTML-Xref">(texinfo)HTML Xref</a>).
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $text <b>external_ref</b><i> $command $section $book $node_and_file $href $cross_ref_name</i>
+<a name="IDX210"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats a reference to an external texinfo manual.
+The <var>$command</var> is the ref command (<code>ref</code>, <code>xref</code> or
+<code>pxref</code>, in text, at sentence beginning or in parenthesis).
+The optionnal <var>$section</var> argument is the section in the book and
+ <var>book</var> is the book title.
+<var>$node_and_file</var> is the node and file name formatted according to the
+convention used in info: <samp>`(file)node'</samp>. <var>$href</var> it an hypertextual
+reference to the distant manual constructed using the above function.
+<var>$cross_ref_name</var> is an optionnal cross
+reference name appearing in the reference command. This function returns
+the text corresponding with the external html manual reference.
+This function returns the full formatted text of the external reference.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Internal-reference"></a>
+<a name="SEC59"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC58" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC60" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC57" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.7.2 Reference to an internal node </h3>
+
+<p>A function reference is available for internal references.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $text <b>internal_ref</b><i> $command $href $short_name $name $is_section</i>
+<a name="IDX211"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats a reference to a node in the current manual.
+The <var>$command</var> is the ref command (<code>ref</code>, <code>xref</code> or
+<code>pxref</code>, in text, at sentence beginning or in parenthesis).
+<var>$href</var> it an hypertextual reference linking to the corresponding
+node or section. <var>$short_name</var> and <var>$name</var> hold the text for the
+reference but <var>$short_name</var> can be the node name which is assumed to
+be shorter than the section name.
+<var>$is_section</var> is a boolean true if the reference is a reference to a
+section. This function returns the full formatted text of the internal
+reference.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Alignement-commands"></a>
+<a name="SEC60"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC59" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC61" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text </h2>
+
+
+<p>When a command controlling the alignement of text is used (<code>@center</code>,
+<code>@flushleft</code> and <code>@flushright</code>), the main program takes
+care of opening and closing paragraphs. The alignement commands are the
+key of the <a name="IDX212"></a>
+<code>%paragraph_style</code> hash.
+The value is used in the function doing the formatting of the paragraphs.
+See section <a href="#SEC61">Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region</a>.
+</p>
+<p>A function references allows for a customization of the formatting of the text
+appearing in the command block.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $result <b>paragraph_style_command</b><i> $command $text</i>
+<a name="IDX213"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the command name, <var>$text</var> is the text appearing within
+the command. This function returns a formatted text.
+The default is to return the text unmodified.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Paragraph-and-preformatted-region"></a>
+<a name="SEC61"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC60" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC62" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.9 Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region </h2>
+
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC62">7.9.1 Paragraph and preformatted region formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC63">7.9.2 Avoiding paragraphs in formats</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Paragraph-and-preformatted-formatting"></a>
+<a name="SEC62"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC61" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC63" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC61" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.9.1 Paragraph and preformatted region formatting </h3>
+
+
+<p>The formatting of a paragraph region or a preformatted region, is controlled
+by function references:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $paragraph_text <b>paragraph</b><i> $text $alignement $formatting_command $formatting_command_formatted \$paragraph_number $format $item_number $enumerate_style $number</i>
+<a name="IDX214"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats a paragraph. <var>$text</var> is the text of the paragraph,
+<var>$alignement</var> is the empty string when no alignement command has
+been seen, otherwise it is the current alignement command name.
+See section <a href="#SEC60">Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The remaining arguments are usefull when the paragraph appears within a
+list or table. It is usefull whenever the paragraph has to be formatted
+differently when appearing in such environments.
+Moreover in that case the format command (<code>@itemize</code>&hellip;)
+may have
+an associated formatting command.
+<var>$formatting_command</var> is this formatting command
+(like <code>@minus</code>).
+<var>$formatting_command_formatted</var> is the command formatted in html
+in case the formatting command is a leading command (like <code>@minus</code>)
+which should be leading the first paragraph.
+<var>\$paragraph_number</var> is a reference on the number of
+paragraphs in that format command. The corresponding variable should be
+increased when a paragraph is added. <var>$format</var> is the format command.
+See section <a href="#SEC66">Formatting individual table and list items</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If the <var>$format</var> is an enumerate, <var>$item_number</var> is the number of
+the item in the list, <var>$enumerate_style</var> is the argument of the enumerate,
+<var>$number</var> is the number or letter corresponding with this item.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $preformatted_text <b>preformatted</b><i> $text $style $region_name $formatting_command $formatting_command_formatted \$preformatted_number $format $item_number $enumerate_style $number</i>
+<a name="IDX215"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats a preformatted region. <var>$text</var> is the text of the
+preformatted region, <var>$style</var> is the css style associated with that
+preformatted region (See section <a href="#SEC34">Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a>). <var>$region_name</var> is the
+name of the command opening
+the preformatted region (<code>example</code>&hellip;, see <a href="#SEC64">Formatting of complex formats (<code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;)</a>)
+or a identifier for the preformatted context (for example
+<code>menu-comment</code>, see <a href="#SEC73">Menu formatting</a>).
+The alignment commands are not taken into account, as the spaces are
+preserved in preformatted regions, you should flush and center by hand.
+</p>
+<p>The remaining arguments are usefull when the preformatted region appears
+within a list or table. It is usefull whenever the preformatted region
+has to be formatted
+differently when appearing in such environments.
+Moreover in that case the format command (<code>@itemize</code>&hellip;)
+may have
+an associated formatting command.
+<var>$formatting_command</var> is this formatting command
+(like <code>@minus</code>).
+<var>$formatting_command_formatted</var> is the command formatted in html
+in case the formatting command is a leading command (like <code>@minus</code>)
+which should be leading the first preformatted region.
+<var>\$preformatted_number</var> is a reference on the number of
+preformatted regions in that format command. The corresponding variable
+should be increased when a preformatted region is added. <var>$format</var> is the
+format command.
+See section <a href="#SEC66">Formatting individual table and list items</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If the <var>$format</var> is an enumerate, <var>$item_number</var> is the number of
+the item in the list, <var>$enumerate_style</var> is the argument of the enumerate,
+<var>$number</var> is the number or letter corresponding with this item.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Avoiding-paragraphs"></a>
+<a name="SEC63"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC62" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC64" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC61" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.9.2 Avoiding paragraphs in formats </h3>
+
+
+<p>It is possible to avoid that a format closes the previous paragraph or
+preformatted region and reopens one, by putting the format command in a
+hash, <a name="IDX216"></a>
+<code>%format_in_paragraph</code> with a true value.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Complex-formats"></a>
+<a name="SEC64"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC63" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC65" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.10 Formatting of complex formats (<code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;) </h2>
+
+
+<p>Here we see how a whole complex format is formatted. For the formatting
+of the text, see <a href="#SEC61">Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The formatting of the complex formats is ultimately controlled by a
+function, however the default for this function uses a hash reference and
+changing the hash reference values should be enough in most cases. This
+hash reference is called <a name="IDX217"></a>
+<code>$complex_format_map</code>. It has a key for each
+of the complex format commands (<code>example</code>, <code>smallexample</code>,
+<code>lisp</code>, <code>smalllisp</code>, <code>display</code>, <code>smalldisplay</code>,
+<code>format</code>, <code>smallformat</code>).
+</p>
+<p>The associated value is also a reference on a hash. The keys are <code>begin</code>
+and <code>end</code>. An eval of <code>begin</code> should lead to the beginning of the
+formatted <acronym>HTML</acronym>, an eval of <code>end</code> should lead to the end of the
+formatted <acronym>HTML</acronym>. The enclosed text will be formatted as described in
+<a href="#SEC61">Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region</a>, and the name of the complex
+format will be available to the function formatting the text.
+</p>
+<p>If you aren't satisfied with this scheme, you can redefine the following
+function reference for a better control over the complex format formatting:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $complex_format_text <b>complex_format</b><i> $format_name $preformatted_text</i>
+<a name="IDX218"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$format_name</var> is the complex format name, <var>$preformatted_text</var> is the
+text allready formatted as described in <a href="#SEC61">Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region</a>.
+This function returns the whole complex format.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Lists-tables"></a>
+<a name="SEC65"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC64" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC66" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.11 Customizing the formatting of lists and tables </h2>
+
+<p>The formatting of lists and tables is done at two levels:
+</p><ul class="toc">
+<li>
+At the level of the whole region (table or list),
+</li><li>
+At the level of the individual items, rows or cells of the list or table.
+</li></ul>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC66">7.11.1 Formatting individual table and list items</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC67">7.11.2 Formatting of a whole table or list</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Table-and-list-items"></a>
+<a name="SEC66"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC65" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC67" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC65" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.11.1 Formatting individual table and list items </h3>
+
+<p>In texinfo it is possible to give <code>@itemize</code> or table command (hereafter
+called a <em>format command</em>) a <em>formatting command</em>.
+For example <code>@minus</code> is the formatting command here:
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@table @minus
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The default is to apply the command to the text item, however it is possible
+to avoid it.
+The hash <a name="IDX219"></a>
+<code>%special_list_commands</code> has an entry for each of the
+format command. Each of these entries is a hash reference. If a formatting
+command is a key of the hash reference, then the formatting command is not
+applied to the text item for that format command. For example, if we have:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$special_list_commands{'itemize'} = { 'bullet' =&gt; '' };
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>and we have the following <code>@itemize</code>:
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@itemize @bullet
+@item an item
+@end itemize
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>then <code>@bullet</code> will not be applied to <code>an item</code>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <em>lists</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The items of lists are formatted using the following function reference:
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $list_item <b>list_item</b><i> $text $format $command $formatted_command $item_number $enumerate_style $number</i>
+<a name="IDX220"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats the text between <code>@item</code> commands. <var>$text</var>
+is the text corresponding with the item. <var>$format</var> is the type of format,
+<samp>`itemize'</samp> or <samp>`enumerate'</samp>. <var>$command</var> is the formatting command
+given in argument to <code>@itemize</code>, <var>$formatted_command</var> is this command
+formatted if it is a leading command, like <code>@minus</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If the <var>$format</var> is an enumerate, <var>$item_number</var> is the number of
+the item in the list, <var>$enumerate_style</var> is the argument of the enumerate,
+<var>$number</var> is the number or letter corresponding with this item.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <em>two column tables</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The two columns tables (<code>@table</code>, <code>@ftable</code> and <code>@vtable</code>),
+items are formatted using two function references,
+one for the first line located on the <code>@item</code> line corresponding
+with the first column, the other for the text appearing on the
+following lines, corresponding with the second column text.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $table_item <b>table_item</b><i> $item_text $index_label_text $format $command $formatted_command</i>
+<a name="IDX221"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is used to format the text on the <code>@item</code> line.
+<var>$text_item</var> is the text line. In case there is an index entry
+associated with the <code>@item</code> (as with <code>@ftable</code> and
+<code>@vtable</code>), <var>$index_label_text</var> is the text inserted at
+the place where an index entry appears. See section <a href="#SEC77">Formatting of index entries</a>.
+<var>$format</var> is the type of format,
+<samp>`table'</samp>, <samp>`ftable'</samp> or <samp>`vtable'</samp>. <var>$command</var> is the formatting command
+given in argument to the table format command, <var>$formatted_command</var> is
+this command formatted if it is a leading command, like <code>@minus</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $table_line <b>table_line</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX222"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is used to format the text on the lines following
+the <code>@item</code> line. <var>$text</var> is the corresponding text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <em>multitable</em></dt>
+<dd><p>The multitable elements formatting is controlled by the functions associated
+with two function references. One for a cell, and the other for a row.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $multitable_cell <b>cell</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX223"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is used to format the text of a multitable cell, the text
+following a <code>@item</code> or a <code>@tab</code>.
+<var>$text</var> is the corresponding text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $multitable_row <b>row</b><i> $text $item_command</i>
+<a name="IDX224"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is used to format a multitable row. <var>$text</var> is
+the row text, with cells allready formatted with the <a name="IDX225"></a>
+<code>$cell</code>
+function reference. <var>$item_command</var> is the command used to introduce
+the row, such that it is possible to distinguish between <code>@item</code> and
+<code>@headitem</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Whole-table-list"></a>
+<a name="SEC67"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC66" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC68" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC65" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.11.2 Formatting of a whole table or list </h3>
+
+<p>If the Texinfo command is a key of the <a name="IDX226"></a>
+<code>%format_map</code>, the associated
+value is used to specify the formatting of the construct, otherwise a function
+is called.
+The value in <code>%format_map</code> associated with a command is interpreted
+similarly with values associated with more simpler commands:
+</p>
+<ul class="toc">
+<li>
+If the text is a word, it is considered to be an <acronym>HTML</acronym> element
+name, and the whole table or list is enclosed between the element opening
+and the element closing.
+</li><li>
+If the text is a word followed by some text,
+the word and is interpreted as above, and the
+text is considered to be the attributes text of the element.
+</li><li>
+If the text is empty nothing is added to the text.
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>In case the <code>%format_map</code> isn't used, a function reference called
+<code>$table_list</code>
+should be redefined, the associated function will be called each time
+a command isn't found in <code>%format_map</code>.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $whole_table_list <b>table_list</b><i> $command $text</i>
+<a name="IDX227"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the Texinfo command name, <var>$text</var> is the formatted
+items.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>If you still want to use <a name="IDX228"></a>
+<code>%format_map</code> but differently from
+the default, it is possible to redefine the following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $whole_table_list <b>format</b><i> $command $format $text</i>
+<a name="IDX229"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the @-command, <var>$format</var> is the entry associated with
+<var>$command</var> in <code>%format_map</code>. <var>$text</var> is the formatted items.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Definitions"></a>
+<a name="SEC68"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC67" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC69" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.12 Definition commands formatting </h2>
+
+<p>The formatting of definition commands is controlled by a hash and four
+functions. The hash describes how the text on the definition line is
+interpreted, the functions control the formatting of the definition line
+and the definition function text.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC69">7.12.1 Customizing the interpretation of a definition line</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC70">7.12.2 Customization of the definition formatting</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Definition-line"></a>
+<a name="SEC69"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC68" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC70" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC68" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.12.1 Customizing the interpretation of a definition line </h3>
+
+<p>The keys of the hash <a name="IDX230"></a>
+<code>%def_map</code> are definition command names.
+There are two types of entries:
+</p>
+<ul class="toc">
+<li> If the command is a shortcut for
+another definition command the value is a text and the definition
+command is replaced by the text.
+
+<p>For example if we have:
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$def_map{'deftruc'} = '@defvr {A truc}';
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>and a line like
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@deftruc var
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>the line will be transformed in
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@defvr {A truc} var
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+</li><li>
+If the command isn't a shortcut, it is associated with an array
+reference. The first element is <samp>`f'</samp>, <samp>`v'</samp> or <samp>`t'</samp> corresponding
+with the index type (<samp>`f'</samp> for function, <samp>`v'</samp> for variable,
+<samp>`t'</samp> for type).
+
+<p>The remaining of the array describes how to interpret the text following
+the definition command on the definition command line.
+The entry item specify what corresponds
+with the next bracketed item or word. Currently the possibilities are
+<samp>`category'</samp>, <samp>`name'</samp>, <samp>`type'</samp>, <samp>`class'</samp> and <samp>`arg'</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>For example if we have
+</p><table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">def_map{'defvr'} = [ 'v', 'category', 'name' ];
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The first bracketed item following <code>@defvr</code> is considered
+to be the category and the next one is the name. The index associated
+with the definition line is the variables index.
+</p></li></ul>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Definition-formatting"></a>
+<a name="SEC70"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC69" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC71" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC68" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.12.2 Customization of the definition formatting </h3>
+
+<p>Four functions are used when formatting a definition command:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> category name</dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $category <b>definition_category</b><i> $category_or_name $class $style</i>
+<a name="IDX231"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function precise a category or an index entry name associating a class
+<var>$class</var> (if given) with <var>$category_or_name</var>. The <var>$style</var> of the
+definition may be <samp>`f'</samp>, for function, <samp>`v'</samp>, for variable or <samp>`t'</samp>,
+for type.
+</p></dd></dl>
+</dd>
+<dt> formatting of the definition line</dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $line <b>def_line</b><i> $category $name $type $arguments $index_label</i>
+<a name="IDX232"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats the definition line. <var>$category</var> is the category
+formatted with <a name="IDX233"></a>
+<code>$definition_category</code>, <var>$name</var>, <var>$type</var> and
+<var>arguments</var> are the element of the definition line. <var>$index_label</var> is
+the text inserted at the place where an index entry appears.
+See section <a href="#SEC77">Formatting of index entries</a>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> definition text</dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $definition_text <b>def_item</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX234"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats the definition text, <var>$text</var>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> the whole definition</dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $definition <b>def</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX235"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats the whole definition. The definition line and text
+formatted by the above functions are in <var>$text</var>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Headings"></a>
+<a name="SEC71"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC70" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC72" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.13 Customizing headings formatting </h2>
+
+<p>A function controls the formatting of sectioning element headings,
+with the corresponding function reference:
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $heading_text <b>heading</b><i> \%element_reference</i>
+<a name="IDX236"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The <var>\%element_reference</var> is a reference on a hash corresponding
+with the sectioning element. The following keys are of interest:
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>text</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The heading text
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>name</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The heading text without section number
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>node</code></dt>
+<dd><p>true if the sectioning element is a node without associated structuring command
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>level</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The level of the element in the document tree. <samp>`0'</samp> is for <code>@top</code>,
+<samp>`1'</samp> for <code>@chapter</code> and so on
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>tag_level</code></dt>
+<dd><p>the sectioning element name, with <code>@raisesections</code> and
+<code>@lowersections</code> taken into account
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+</dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Special-regions"></a>
+<a name="SEC72"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC71" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC73" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.14 Formatting of special regions (<code>@verbatim</code>, <code>@cartouche</code>, <code>@quotation</code>) </h2>
+
+<p>Regions corresponding with raw text, like <code>@verbatim</code>, <code>@html</code>
+or <code>@tex</code> are formatted according to the following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $raw_region <b>raw</b><i> $command $text</i>
+<a name="IDX237"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the command name, <var>$text</var> is the raw text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>If LaTeX2HTML is used, <code>@tex</code> regions are handled differently,
+from within the main program.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>@cartouche</code> command formatting is controlled by the
+function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $cartouche <b>cartouche</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX238"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$text</var> is the text appearing within the cartouche.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The formatting of <code>@quotation</code> is controlled by two function references.
+The first one is usefull in case the <code>@quotation</code> has an argument, as
+it allows to prepend a string to the quotation text:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $prepended_string <b>quotation_prepend_text</b><i> $style $text</i>
+<a name="IDX239"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$style</var> is the first argument of the <code>@quotation</code> if there are
+two arguments. <var>$text</var> is the second argument or the first if there is
+one argument. There are still @-commands in these strings. This function
+can return a string which will be prepended to the quotation text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The whole quotation is formatted by:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $quotation <b>quotation</b><i> $quotation_text $argument_text $argument_style_texi $argument_style_id</i>
+<a name="IDX240"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$quotation_text</var> is the quotation text, formatted, with the text
+prepended by the function above. <var>$argument_text</var> is the second argument
+of the <code>@quotation</code> or the first if there is one argument, formatted.
+The other arguments are defiend if there are two arguments for the
+<code>@quotation</code>, <var>$argument_style_texi</var> is this argument, with
+@-commands, and <var>$argument_style_id</var> is this argument transformed in
+an identifier which can be used as an <acronym>XML</acronym> identifier.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Menus"></a>
+<a name="SEC73"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC72" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC74" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.15 Menu formatting </h2>
+
+<p>To understand how the formatting of menus is controlled, the different
+parts of a menu are first described, then how to control the formatting
+of each of these parts.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC74">7.15.1 The structure of a menu</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> A menu consists in menu entry and menu
+ comments
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Menu-parts"></a>
+<a name="SEC74"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC73" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC75" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC73" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.15.1 The structure of a menu </h3>
+
+<p>In <code>texi2html</code>, a menu is considered to be composed of 2 parts, the
+<em>menu entries</em> and the <em>menu comments</em>. Menu entries are further
+divided in an <em>entry link</em> and optionnaly an <em>entry description</em>.
+The entry link consists in a node name and an optionnal menu entry
+name.
+</p>
+<p>A menu entry begins with <samp>`*'</samp> at the beginning of the line. It begins
+with the entry link, followed by the description. The description spans until
+the next menu entry, or some text begining at the first character of a line
+or an empty line, not contained within a command block which begun in the
+description. An empty line or a line with text at the first character
+starts a menu comment, which spans until the next menu entry.
+</p>
+<p>Here is an illustration of these rules:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">@menu
+* node name: entry name. description begins
+ description continues
+* another menu entry::
+ description begins
+ description continues
+
+ A menu comment, after an empty line
+
+* node:: description begins
+A menu comment. The line starts at the first character
+
+* last entry:: description begins <em>text
+of the description, even if the line begins at the first character,
+because we are in @emph</em>.
+@end menu
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Menu-formatting"></a>
+<a name="SEC75"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC74" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC76" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC73" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components </h3>
+
+<p>In the default case, the name of the section corresponding with the
+node is used instead of the node name. If <a name="IDX241"></a>
+<code>$NODE_NAME_IN_MENU</code> is
+true, however, node names are used. If <a name="IDX242"></a>
+<code>$AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY</code>
+is true and menu entry equal menu description the description isn't printed.
+This is the default. Likewise, if node or section name equal entry name,
+do not print entry name.
+</p>
+<p>A symbol, <a name="IDX243"></a>
+<code>$MENU_SYMBOL</code> is put at the beginning of menu entries
+when the node name is used. The default is <samp>`&amp;bull;'</samp>.
+If <a name="IDX244"></a>
+<code>$UNNUMBERED_SYMBOL_IN_MENU</code> is true it is
+also put at the beginning of unnumbered section names. This is not
+done by default.
+</p>
+<p>The menu comments are considered to be preformatted text. The style
+associated with this preformatted text is determined by
+<a name="IDX245"></a>
+<code>$MENU_PRE_STYLE</code>. Default is <samp>`font-family: serif'</samp>.
+The css class associated with menu comments is <code>menu-comments</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Three function references are associated with the formatting of the
+different parts of a menu:
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $link <b>menu_link</b><i> $section \%state $href $node $name $ending</i>
+<a name="IDX246"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$section</var> is the section name corresponding with the link, <var>$href</var>
+is the link hypertextual reference. <var>$href</var> may be absent. <var>\%state</var>
+holds informations about the current context. The only key which could be
+of interest is <code>preformatted</code>, true if the context is a preformatted
+context. See section <a href="#SEC48">Three contexts for expansions: preformatted, normal and string</a>.
+<var>$node</var> is the node name, <var>$name</var> is the
+name of the node, and <var>$ending</var> is the text ending the link entry.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $description <b>menu_description</b><i> $description_text \%state</i>
+<a name="IDX247"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$description_text</var> is the text of the menu description. <var>\%state</var>
+should be used similarly than for the menu link.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $menu_comment <b>menu_comment</b><i> $text</i>
+<a name="IDX248"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$text</var> is the text of the menu comment. It is in a preformatted
+environment.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The following function reference controls the formatting of a wole menu:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $menu <b>menu</b><i> $menu_components_text</i>
+<a name="IDX249"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$menu_components_text</var> is the formatted menu components text, obtained
+as explained above.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The last function reference corresponds with a special case. It
+is used when a menu entry appears within another block command, to
+avoid the possibilities of invalid <acronym>HTML</acronym> production.
+In that case the menu description and menu comments are not formatted
+specially, but treated like normal text.
+</p><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $link <b>simple_menu_link</b><i> $link_text $href $node $name $ending</i>
+<a name="IDX250"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$link_text</var> is the text corresponding with the link name, <var>$href</var>
+is the link hypertextual reference.
+<var>$node</var> is the node name, <var>$name</var> is the
+name of the node, and <var>$ending</var> is the text ending the link entry.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Indices"></a>
+<a name="SEC76"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC75" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC77" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.16 Indices formatting </h2>
+
+<p>Two different things needs to be handled for indices formatting, the place
+where the index term appears, the index entry, and the index list itself.
+The indexing commands like <code>@cindex</code> determines where index entries
+appear, and the index list is printed with a <code>@printindex</code> command.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC77">7.16.1 Formatting of index entries</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Index entries in the main document are
+ targets for hypertext references
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC78">7.16.2 Customizing the formatting of index lists</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Customizing the formatting of the index list
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Index-entry-place"></a>
+<a name="SEC77"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC76" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC78" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC76" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.16.1 Formatting of index entries </h3>
+
+<p>Index entry places in the main text may be the target for hypertext
+references. Their formatting
+is controlled by the function associated with the following function
+reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $target <b>index_entry_label</b><i> $identifier $preformatted</i>
+<a name="IDX251"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$identifier</var> should be used to create
+a target for links (typically associated with a name or id
+attribute in <acronym>HTML</acronym>).
+<var>$preformatted</var> is true if the index entry appeared in preformatted text.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Index-list"></a>
+<a name="SEC78"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC77" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC79" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC76" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.16.2 Customizing the formatting of index lists </h3>
+
+<p>The index entries are sorted alphabetically. A whole index list is
+considered to be composed of letter entries. A letter entry is composed
+by all the index entries beginning with that letter. A letter may
+be a non alphabetical character, but we call it letter here.
+</p>
+<p>An index summary appears at the beginning and at the end of an index list,
+and should be used to jump directly to a letter entry. Indices lists
+may be split across pages, thus the different letters may appear on different
+files. The number of index entries appearing on each page is determined
+by a variable <a name="IDX252"></a>
+<code>$SPLIT_INDEX</code> if set. The default is to split
+indices after 100 entries.
+</p>
+<p>The formatting of all these elements is controlled by the following
+function references:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <em>formatting of a letter in a summary</em></dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $letter <b>summary_letter</b><i> $letter $file $identifier</i>
+<a name="IDX253"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function is used to format a letter appearing in a summary, refering
+to a letter entry in the index list.
+<var>$letter</var> is the letter. <var>$file</var> is the file name where the letter
+entry appears. More precisely, it is empty when the letter entry is on the
+same page than the summary, it contains the file name when the index page
+is split accross page. <var>$identifier</var> is an identifier for the target
+letter entry.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <em>formatting of a summary</em></dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $summary <b>index_summary</b><i> \@alphabetical_letters \@nonalphabetical_letters</i>
+<a name="IDX254"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>\@alphabetical_letters</var> and <var>\@nonalphabetical_letters</var> contain the
+formatted summary letters, formatted with the above function.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <em>formatting of an index entry</em></dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $entry <b>index_entry</b><i> $entry_href $entry_text $section_href $section_heading</i>
+<a name="IDX255"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$entry_href</var> is a reference to the place where the index entry
+appeared, <var>$entry_text</var> is the corresponding text. <var>$section_href</var>
+is a reference to the beginning of the sectioning element containing
+the index entry, <var>$section_heading</var> is the heading of the element.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <em>formatting of letter entry</em></dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $letter_entry <b>index_letter</b><i> $letter $identifier $index_entries_text</i>
+<a name="IDX256"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats a letter entry, consisting in all the index entries
+beginning with this letter. <var>$letter</var> is the letter, <var>$identifier</var>
+should be used to create a target for links (typically links from summaries),
+and <var>$index_entries_text</var> is the text of the index entries formatted as
+described above.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <em>formatting of whole index</em></dt>
+<dd><dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $index <b>print_index</b><i> $index_text $index_name</i>
+<a name="IDX257"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$index_text</var> is the text of all the index entries grouped by letter
+appearing in that page formatted as above. <var>index_name</var> is the name of
+the index, the argument of <code>@printindex</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Floats-and-lists-of-floats"></a>
+<a name="SEC79"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC78" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC80" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.17 Floats and lists of floats </h2>
+
+<p>Floats appear in the <code>@float</code> environment, optionaly with a style
+and a label, and with optionnal <code>@caption</code> and <code>@shortcaption</code>.
+Their list appear after a <code>@listoffloats</code>.
+</p>
+<p>A hash reference is associated with each float, it is available in some
+formatting functions. The keys are:
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>caption_texi</code></dt>
+<dt> <code>shortcaption_texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A reference on an array containing the caption or shortcaption lines,
+unformatted.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>style_texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The style with texi @-commands.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>style_id</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The unique identifier associated with the style.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>nr</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The number with the same conventions than makeinfo (use the chapter number a
+dot and then the number of the float of that style in the chapter, or an
+absolute number if in unnumbered).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>chapter_nr</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The number of the chapter containing the float.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>nr_in_chapter</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The number of the float in the chapter.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>absolut_nr</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The number of the float in the document.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The label with @-commands.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>id</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The unique identifier associated with the label. Usefull to make an anchor
+or a reference.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>element</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A reference on a structure representing the element the float appear in.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC80">7.17.1 Formatting a float</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Formatting of floats
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC81">7.17.2 Formatting lists of floats</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"> Formatting the lists of floats
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Floats"></a>
+<a name="SEC80"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC79" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC81" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC79" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.17.1 Formatting a float </h3>
+
+<p>First there is an occasion to construct a texinfo text for the caption, using
+the caption texinfo lines and the informations in the float structure.
+The returned lines will be formatted in the main program. A function reference
+is used here:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> (\@caption_lines_returned, \@shortcaption_lines_returned) <b>caption_shortcaption</b><i> \%float \@caption_lines \@shortcaption_lines</i>
+<a name="IDX258"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>\%float</var> is the structure defined above. <var>\@caption_lines</var> and
+<var>\@shortcaption_lines</var> are references on arrays containing the
+texinfo lines for caption and short caption. <var>\@caption_lines_returned</var>
+and <var>\@shortcaption_lines_returned</var> are references on an array
+containing the texinfo lines for the caption and shortcaption.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>Then the float is formatted with the following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $text <b>float</b><i> $float_text \%float $caption_text $shortcaption_text</i>
+<a name="IDX259"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$float_text</var> is the text appearing within the <code>@float</code>, formatted.
+<var>\%float</var> is still the structure defined above. <var>$caption_text</var> and
+<var>$shortcaption_text</var> are the caption and short caption build with the
+above function and formatted.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Lists-of-floats"></a>
+<a name="SEC81"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC80" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC82" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC79" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h3 class="subsection"> 7.17.2 Formatting lists of floats </h3>
+
+<p>A list of floats is introduced by <code>@listoffloats</code>. The argument of
+<code>@listoffloats</code> is the <em>style</em>. First the style texinfo can be
+modified with the following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $style_texi_returned <b>listoffloats_style</b><i> $style_texi</i>
+<a name="IDX260"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$style_texi</var> is the <code>@listoffloats</code> argument with texinfo
+@-commands kept. It is possible to make changes to the <var>$style_texi</var> and
+return a modified string, still with @-commands. The modified string
+is formatted in the main program.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>After that, for each of the floats with that style, first there is a
+possibility to modify the float style and the float caption before they
+are formatted in the main program, with the following function references:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $float_style_texi_returned <b>listoffloats_float_style</b><i> $style_texi \%float</i>
+<a name="IDX261"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$style_texi</var> is the style, and <var>\%float</var> is the structure described
+above. This function reference returns a style to be formatted in the
+main program.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $caption_texi_returned <b>listoffloats_caption</b><i> \%float</i>
+<a name="IDX262"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>\%float</var> is the structure described
+above. This function reference returns a caption to be formatted in the
+main program.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>Each entry is formatted by:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $listoffloats_entry <b>listoffloats_entry</b><i> $style_texi \%float $float_style $caption $href</i>
+<a name="IDX263"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$style_texi</var> is the style with @-commands, <var>$float_style</var> is the
+style returned by the above function and formatted. <var>$caption</var> is the
+caption returned by the above function formatted. <var>\%float</var> is the
+structure corresponding with the float, and <var>$href</var> is an href pointing to
+the float location.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>Lastly, the whole <code>@listoffloats</code> is formatted by:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> $listoffloats <b>listoffloats</b><i> $style_texi $style \@listoffloats_entries</i>
+<a name="IDX264"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$style_texi</var> is the style with @-commands, <var>$style</var> is the
+style returned by the above function and formatted. The array reference
+<var>\@listoffloats_entries</var> holds the entries formatted by the above
+function.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Footnotes"></a>
+<a name="SEC82"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC81" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC83" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.18 Customizing the footnotes formatting </h2>
+
+<p>Each footnote is associated with a footnote entry. Several footnote entries
+are grouped in a footnote section. When a footnote appears, two things must
+be formatted: in the main text the place where the footnote appear
+and the footnote text.
+</p>
+<p>Two functions, with corresponding function references control the formatting
+of the footnotes:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> (\@lines $text_for_document) <b>foot_line_and_ref</b><i> $number_in_doc $number_in_page $footnote_id $place_id $document_file $footnote_file \@lines \%state</i>
+<a name="IDX265"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$number_in_doc</var> is the footnote number in the whole document,
+<var>$number_in_page</var> is the footnote number in the current page.
+<var>$footnote_id</var> is an identifier for the footnote in the footnote text
+which should be used to make target for references to that footnote,
+while <var>$place_id</var> is an identifier for the location of the footnote
+in the main document. Similarly, <var>$document_file</var> is the file name
+of the file containing the text where the footnote appears in the main
+document, while <var>$footnote_file</var> is the file name of the file where
+the footnote text appears.
+</p>
+<p><var>\@lines</var> is a reference on an array containing the footnote text
+lines, allready formatted.
+And <var>\%state</var> holds informations about the context at the footnote
+place in the main document. As usual the most usefull entry is
+<code>preformatted</code> which is true if the footnote appears in a preformatted
+context.
+</p>
+<p>This function returns a reference on an array, <var>\@lines</var> containing
+the updated footnote text for the footnote entry, and <var>$text_for_document</var>,
+the text appearing at the footnote place in the main document, linking
+to the footnote entry.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>The following function is only used when footnotes are at the bottom
+of a page and the document is split.
+For customization of the footnotes page in case they are on a separated
+page or section, <a href="#SEC44">Customizing the layout of the special pages</a>. For
+the determination of the footnote locations, <a href="#SEC10">Page layout related command line options</a>.
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> <b>foot_section</b><i> \@footnotes_lines</i>
+<a name="IDX266"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This function formats a group of footnotes. <var>\@footnotes_lines</var> is a
+reference on an array holding the lines of all the footnote entries
+formatted as explained above. This function modifies the reference.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Other-and-unknown-commands"></a>
+<a name="SEC83"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC82" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="section"> 7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands </h2>
+
+
+
+<p>Many commands without braces are available in texinfo, sometimes with
+a specific syntax. For example we have <code>@sp</code>, <code>@noindent</code>,
+<code>@documentlanguage</code>, <code>@oddheading</code>, <code>@headings</code>,
+<code>@shortcontents</code>, <code>@shorttitlepage</code> or <code>@comment</code>.
+<code>texi2html</code> interprets
+some of these commands and some functions or variables are used for
+their formatting or to access their information.
+In the default case, however, most of these constructs are ignored.
+</p>
+<p>It is possible to change how the things following these commands
+on the line are handled, what is considered to be an arg for those
+commands and it is also possible to keep them instead of discarding
+them such that it is possible to handle them specially, with the
+same function than the one used for unknown commands.
+</p>
+<p>Those special commands without braces are the key of a hash:
+<a name="IDX267"></a>
+<code>%misc_command</code>. The associated value is a reference on a
+hash enabling to set the properties of these commands. The
+keys of this hash reference is the name of a property, the value
+is the value of the property. For example here we have <code>line</code>
+for the <code>arg</code> property for the <code>command</code> @-command.
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">$misc_command{'command'} = {'arg' =&gt; 'line', 'skip' =&gt; 'space'};
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>The properties and possible values are:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>skip</code></dt>
+<dd><p>This property enables to set what is skipped after the command arguments.
+Here are the possible values:
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt> <code>line</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The remaining of the line is skipped.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>space</code> </dt>
+<dd><p>Spaces are skipped but not newline.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>whitespace</code> </dt>
+<dd><p>Spaces are skipped
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>linewhitespace</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Spaces are skipped if there are only spaces remaining on the line.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>linespace</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Spaces are skipped, but not newline if
+there are only spaces remaining on the line
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt> <code>arg</code></dt>
+<dd><p>If the associated value is <code>line</code> the line is considered to be the
+argument. If it is a number it is the number of args (separated by spaces).
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>texi</code></dt>
+<dd><p>If true the arguments are considered to real texinfo, therefore
+ <code>@value</code> and <code>@macro</code> are expanded.
+</p></dd>
+<dt> <code>keep</code></dt>
+<dd><p>If true the args and the macro are kept, otherwise they are discarded.
+The defaut is to have <code>keep</code> undef for all the commands.
+If <code>keep</code> is true for <code>@verbatiminclude</code> the default
+action for this macro isn't done.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<p>Commands which don't appear in the hashes
+<a name="IDX268"></a>
+<code>%simple_map</code>, <a name="IDX269"></a>
+<code>%simple_map_pre</code>,
+<a name="IDX270"></a>
+<code>%simple_map_texi</code> and <code>%misc_command</code>, or that appear in
+<code>%misc_command</code> but with <code>keep</code> true are processed by the
+following function reference:
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> ($result_line, $result, $result_text, $message) <b>unknown</b><i> $command $line</i>
+<a name="IDX271"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the @-command, <var>$line</var> is the line following the
+<var>$command</var>. <var>$result</var> is a boolean. If it is true then the other return
+values are taken into account otherwise the default actions are
+used. In case <var>$result</var> is true, <var>$result_line</var> is the new line
+to be processed further, <var>$result_text</var> is the resulting formatted text
+and <var>$message</var>, if defined is a message outputted to the output
+with line number added by <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+<p>Commands with braces not specified above
+nor in <a name="IDX272"></a>
+<code>%style_map</code>, <a name="IDX273"></a>
+<code>%style_map_pre</code> and
+<a name="IDX274"></a>
+<code>%style_map_texi</code> are processed
+by the following function reference
+</p>
+<dl>
+<dt><u>Function Reference:</u> ($result, $result_text, $message) <b>unknown_style</b><i> $command $text</i>
+<a name="IDX275"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><var>$command</var> is the @-command, <var>$text</var> is the text appearing within
+the braces (allready formatted). <var>$result</var> is a boolean. If it is true then
+the other return
+values are taken into account otherwise the default actions are
+used. In case <var>$result</var> is true, <var>$result_text</var> is the resulting
+formatted text
+and <var>$message</var>, if defined is a message outputted to the output
+with line number added by <code>texi2html</code>.
+</p></dd></dl>
+
+
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Internationalization"></a>
+<a name="SEC84"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC83" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC85" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC47" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="appendix"> A. Internationalization </h1>
+
+<p>The strings written in the document are selected based on the
+document language. This can be used to customize the strings,
+as described in <a href="#SEC56">Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a>. This also enables translation of the
+strings.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">A.1 Translating strings</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top"><a href="#SEC86">A.2 Adding new strings written to document</a></td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Translating-strings"></a>
+<a name="SEC85"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC86" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="appendixsec"> A.1 Translating strings </h2>
+
+
+<p>If the language is allready supported, then there will be a file
+in the <tt>`i18n'</tt> directory with name the two-letter
+ISO-639 language code. In that case you can enhance the translations by
+editing this file. There is a <code>$LANGUAGES-&gt;{'<var>language</var>'}</code>
+hash in that file. The keys are the english strings, in <code>''</code>, the
+values (in <code>''</code> after <code>=&gt;</code>) are the translations.
+When a string contains a <samp>`%'</samp> followed by <samp>`{'</samp> <var>name</var> <samp>`}'</samp>
+it means that the string will be expanded by <code>texi2html</code>. For
+an example, see <a href="#SEC56">Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a>.
+</p>
+<p>After that you should run the command <code>./manage_i18n.pl all</code> in
+the top directory, it should merge your file with the existing files in
+<tt>`translations.pl'</tt>, which is incorporated to the <tt>`texi2html'</tt> script
+by <code>./configure</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If the language isn't currently supported, copy the <tt>`en'</tt> file in
+<tt>`i18n'</tt> to a file with name the two-letter ISO-639
+language code of your language
+ and then add your translations to the strings. You could also add your
+two-letter language code in the <tt>`manage_i18n.pl'</tt> file in the
+<code>@known_languages</code> array.
+</p>
+<p>After that you should similarly run the command
+<code>./manage_i18n.pl all</code> in
+the top directory.
+</p>
+<p>Obsoleted strings are not removed from the files, they are still present
+in the <code>$T2H_OBSOLETE_STRINGS-&gt;{'<var>language</var>'}</code> hash in case
+the string is reused later.
+</p>
+<p>If you made change to strings specified in installed files
+(see section <a href="#SEC4">Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a>)
+you will have to reinstall them otherwise the installated files will
+take precedence (see section <a href="#SEC13">Use initialization files for fine tuning</a>).
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Adding-new-strings"></a>
+<a name="SEC86"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC85" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h2 class="appendixsec"> A.2 Adding new strings written to document </h2>
+
+
+<p>If you need to write strings, for example the new string <var>a string</var>
+to the resulting document, call <code>&amp;$I('a string')</code>. Use simple quotes.
+If you want to substitute a value in the string put
+<code>%{<var>string_value</var>}</code>, in the string, and give a second argument
+to <code>&amp;$I</code>, a hash reference with key <var>string_value</var> and value
+the what you want to substitute.
+Here is an example:
+</p>
+<table><tr><td>&nbsp;</td><td><pre class="example">return &amp;$I('%{name} of %{class}', { 'name' =&gt; $name, 'class' =&gt; $class });
+</pre></td></tr></table>
+<p>In that case <code>%{name}</code> is substituted by <code>$name</code> in the translated
+string.
+</p>
+<p>After that you should run the command <code>./manage_i18n.pl all</code> in the top
+directory, it should add your new strings to all the files in the <tt>`i18n'</tt>
+directory.
+</p>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Indexop"></a>
+<a name="SEC87"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC86" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC88" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC84" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC88" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="appendix"> B. Command Line Option Index </h1>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a href="#SEC87_0" class="summary-letter"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_1" class="summary-letter"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_2" class="summary-letter"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_3" class="summary-letter"><b>H</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_4" class="summary-letter"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_5" class="summary-letter"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_6" class="summary-letter"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_7" class="summary-letter"><b>N</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_8" class="summary-letter"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_9" class="summary-letter"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_10" class="summary-letter"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_11" class="summary-letter"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_12" class="summary-letter"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<table border="0" class="index-op">
+<tr><td></td><th align="left">Index Entry</th><th align="left"> Section</th></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_0">C</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX49">css-include=<var>file</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_1">D</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX53">def-table</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX42">doctype=<var>DTD</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX30">D<var>var</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_2">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX36">frames</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX44">frameset-doctype</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX43">frameset-doctype=<var>DTD</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_3">H</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX51">html-xref-prefix=<var>path</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_4">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX34">I<var>dir</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX23">if&lt;region&gt;</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX121">include-css</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX69">init-file</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX70">init-file</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX47">iso</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_5">L</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX61">l2h</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX66">l2h-file</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX62">l2h-l2h=<var>program</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX64">l2h-tmp</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX72">lang</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX206">lang</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC56">7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX28">lang=<var>lang</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_6">M</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX3">menu</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC5">4. Invoking <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_7">N</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX24">no-if&lt;region&gt;</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX21">node-files</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX2">nomenu</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC5">4. Invoking <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX26">nomenu</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX38">nosec-nav</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX57">number</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_8">O</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX10">output</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX12">output</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_9">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX32">P<var>dir</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX1">pkgdatadir=<var>dir</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC4">3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX67">pkgdatadir=dir</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX13">prefix</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_10">S</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX40">separated-footnotes</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX15">short-ext</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX55">short-ref</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX4">split</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX68">sysconfdir=dir</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_11">T</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX19">toc-file</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX59">toc-links</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX17">top-file</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC87_12">U</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX6">use-nodes</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX8">use-nodes</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX9">use-nodes</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX31">U<var>var</var></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+</table>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a href="#SEC87_0" class="summary-letter"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_1" class="summary-letter"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_2" class="summary-letter"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_3" class="summary-letter"><b>H</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_4" class="summary-letter"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_5" class="summary-letter"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_6" class="summary-letter"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_7" class="summary-letter"><b>N</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_8" class="summary-letter"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_9" class="summary-letter"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_10" class="summary-letter"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_11" class="summary-letter"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC87_12" class="summary-letter"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Indexvr"></a>
+<a name="SEC88"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC89" title="Next section in reading order"> &gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC89" title="Next chapter"> &gt;&gt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="appendix"> C. Variable Index </h1>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a href="#SEC88_0" class="summary-letter"><b>$</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC88_1" class="summary-letter"><b>%</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC88_2" class="summary-letter"><b>@</b></a>
+</td></tr></table>
+<table border="0" class="index-vr">
+<tr><td></td><th align="left">Index Entry</th><th align="left"> Section</th></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC88_0">$</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX123"><code>$AFTER_BODY_OPEN</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX153"><code>$AFTER_OVERVIEW</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX155"><code>$AFTER_TOC_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX73"><code>$anchor</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC15">5.1 Redefining functions in initialization files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX198"><code>$anchor</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC54">7.4 Formatting of special simple commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX242"><code>$AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX152"><code>$BEFORE_OVERVIEW</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX154"><code>$BEFORE_TOC_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX78"><code>$BIG_RULE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC19">6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX111"><code>$BODYTEXT</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC32">6.5 Preparing the output</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX127"><code>$BODYTEXT</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX225"><code>$cell</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC66">7.11.1 Formatting individual table and list items</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX194"><code>$CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC51">7.3.1 An interface for commands formatting with a hash reference</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX196"><code>$CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC52">7.3.2 An interface for commands formatting with a string</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX217"><code>$complex_format_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC64">7.10 Formatting of complex formats (<code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX116"><code>$CSS_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX118"><code>$CSS_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX120"><code>$CSS_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX54"><code>$DEF_TABLE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX76"><code>$DEFAULT_RULE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC19">6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX233"><code>$definition_category</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC70">7.12.2 Customization of the definition formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX150"><code>$DO_CONTENTS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX151"><code>$DO_SCONTENTS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX45"><code>$DOCTYPE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX126"><code>$DOCUMENT_DESCRIPTION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX124"><code>$DOCUMENT_ENCODING</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX125"><code>$ENCODING</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX175"><code>$EXTENSION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC45">6.12 Customizing the file names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX52"><code>$EXTERNAL_DIR</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX122"><code>$EXTRA_HEAD</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX37"><code>$FRAMES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX46"><code>$FRAMESET_DOCTYPE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX82"><code>$ICONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC22">6.3.1 Controlling the navigation panel panel at a high level</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX179"><code>$IDX_SUMMARY</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC46">6.13 Generation of external files for index entries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX80"><code>$INDEX_CHAPTER</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC20">Element labels</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX63"><code>$L2H_L2H</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX65"><code>$L2H_TMP</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX29"><code>$LANG</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX71"><code>$LANG</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX207"><code>$LANG</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC56">7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX208"><code>$LANGUAGES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC56">7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85"><code>$LANGUAGES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">A.1 Translating strings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX245"><code>$MENU_PRE_STYLE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX243"><code>$MENU_SYMBOL</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX77"><code>$MIDDLE_RULE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC19">6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX22"><code>$NODE_FILES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX176"><code>$NODE_FILES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC45">6.12 Customizing the file names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX241"><code>$NODE_NAME_IN_MENU</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX58"><code>$NUMBER_SECTIONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX193"><code>$OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC51">7.3.1 An interface for commands formatting with a hash reference</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX195"><code>$OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC52">7.3.2 An interface for commands formatting with a string</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX11"><code>$OUT</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX138"><code>$PRE_BODY_CLOSE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX14"><code>$PREFIX</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX141"><code>$print_chapter_footer</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX131"><code>$print_chapter_header</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX139"><code>$print_foot_navigation</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX128"><code>$print_head_navigation</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX172"><code>$print_misc</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX174"><code>$print_misc_footer</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX173"><code>$print_misc_header</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX143"><code>$print_page_foot</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX130"><code>$print_page_head</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX142"><code>$print_section_footer</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX132"><code>$print_section_header</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX169"><code>$print_Top</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX171"><code>$print_Top_footer</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX170"><code>$print_Top_header</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX39"><code>$SECTION_NAVIGATION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX83"><code>$SECTION_NAVIGATION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC22">6.3.1 Controlling the navigation panel panel at a high level</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX41"><code>$SEPARATED_FOOTNOTES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX56"><code>$SHORT_REF</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX16"><code>$SHORTEXTN</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX27"><code>$SHOW_MENU</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX75"><code>$SMALL_RULE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC19">6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX5"><code>$SPLIT</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX252"><code>$SPLIT_INDEX</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC78">7.16.2 Customizing the formatting of index lists</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85"><code>$T2H_OBSOLETE_STRINGS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">A.1 Translating strings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX91"><code>$Texi2HTML::NODE{Next}</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX105"><code>$Texi2HTML::OVERVIEW</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC30">Section lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX160"><code>$Texi2HTML::OVERVIEW</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX104"><code>$Texi2HTML::THIS_HEADER</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC30">Section lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX103"><code>$Texi2HTML::THIS_SECTION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC30">Section lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX108"><code>$Texi2HTML::THIS_SECTION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC31">6.4.3 Function usefull in page formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX106"><code>$Texi2HTML::TOC_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC30">Section lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX159"><code>$Texi2HTML::TOC_LINES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX20"><code>$TOC_FILE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX60"><code>$TOC_LINKS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX157"><code>$TOC_LIST_ATTRIBUTE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX156"><code>$TOC_LIST_STYLE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX18"><code>$TOP_FILE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX79"><code>$TOP_HEADING</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC20">Element labels</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX244"><code>$UNNUMBERED_SYMBOL_IN_MENU</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX48"><code>$USE_ISO</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX7"><code>$USE_NODES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX81"><code>$VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC22">6.3.1 Controlling the navigation panel panel at a high level</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX87"><code>$WORDS_IN_PAGE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX88"><code>$WORDS_IN_PAGE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX109"><code>$WORDS_IN_PAGE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC31">6.4.3 Function usefull in page formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC88_1">%</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX192"><code>%accent_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC50">7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX93"><code>%ACTIVE_ICONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX113"><code>%BUTTONS_GOTO</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC32">6.5 Preparing the output</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX115"><code>%css_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX117"><code>%css_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX230"><code>%def_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC69">7.12.1 Customizing the interpretation of a definition line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX216"><code>%format_in_paragraph</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC63">7.9.2 Avoiding paragraphs in formats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX226"><code>%format_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC67">7.11.2 Formatting of a whole table or list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX228"><code>%format_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC67">7.11.2 Formatting of a whole table or list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX101"><code>%main::value</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC29">Flags</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX102"><code>%main::value</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC29">Flags</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX267"><code>%misc_command</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX92"><code>%NAVIGATION_TEXT</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX112"><code>%NAVIGATION_TEXT</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC32">6.5 Preparing the output</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX212"><code>%paragraph_style</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX94"><code>%PASSIVE_ICONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX187"><code>%pre_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX183"><code>%simple_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX268"><code>%simple_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX184"><code>%simple_map_pre</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX269"><code>%simple_map_pre</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX185"><code>%simple_map_texi</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX270"><code>%simple_map_texi</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX219"><code>%special_list_commands</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC66">7.11.1 Formatting individual table and list items</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX189"><code>%style_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC50">7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX272"><code>%style_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX190"><code>%style_map_pre</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC50">7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX273"><code>%style_map_pre</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX191"><code>%style_map_texi</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC50">7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX274"><code>%style_map_texi</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX97"><code>%Texi2HTML::HREF</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC26">6.4.1 Accessing elements informations</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX96"><code>%Texi2HTML::NAME</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC26">6.4.1 Accessing elements informations</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX99"><code>%Texi2HTML::NO_TEXI</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC26">6.4.1 Accessing elements informations</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX98"><code>%Texi2HTML::NODE</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC26">6.4.1 Accessing elements informations</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX100"><code>%Texi2HTML::THISDOC</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC28">Global strings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX188"><code>%texi_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX186"><code>%things_map</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC88_2">@</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX89"><code>@CHAPTER_BUTTONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX50"><code>@CSS_FILES</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX25"><code>@EXPAND</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX35"><code>@INCLUDE_DIRS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX90"><code>@MISC_BUTTONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX86"><code>@NODE_FOOTER_BUTTONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX33"><code>@PREPEND_DIRS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX84"><code>@SECTION_BUTTONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#IDX85"><code>@SECTION_FOOTER_BUTTONS</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+</table>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a href="#SEC88_0" class="summary-letter"><b>$</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC88_1" class="summary-letter"><b>%</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC88_2" class="summary-letter"><b>@</b></a>
+</td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="Indexcp"></a>
+<a name="SEC89"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC88" title="Previous section in reading order"> &lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[ &gt; ]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC88" title="Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter"> &lt;&lt; </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Up section"> Up </a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[ &gt;&gt; ]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left"> &nbsp; </td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1 class="appendix"> D. Concept Index </h1>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a href="#SEC89_0" class="summary-letter"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_1" class="summary-letter"><b>B</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_2" class="summary-letter"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_3" class="summary-letter"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_4" class="summary-letter"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_5" class="summary-letter"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_6" class="summary-letter"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_7" class="summary-letter"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_8" class="summary-letter"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_9" class="summary-letter"><b>R</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_10" class="summary-letter"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_11" class="summary-letter"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_12" class="summary-letter"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<table border="0" class="index-cp">
+<tr><td></td><th align="left">Index Entry</th><th align="left"> Section</th></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_0">A</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC63">Avoid paragraph opening</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC63">7.9.2 Avoiding paragraphs in formats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_1">B</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC_Top">bug report</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC_Top">Texi2HTML</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_2">C</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">centering</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC64">complex format</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC64">7.10 Formatting of complex formats (<code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13"><tt>`Config'</tt></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC4">configure</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC4">3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_3">D</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC3">downloading <code>texi2html</code> source</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC3">2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_4">E</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC1">examples of manuals</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC1">1. Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC58">external manual</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC58">7.7.1 Reference to external manual</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_5">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">flushing text</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_6">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC56">i18n</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC56">7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">i18n</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">A.1 Translating strings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC4">Installation</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC4">3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">internationalization</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC86">internationalized strings</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC86">A.2 Adding new strings written to document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_7">M</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC2">makeinfo</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC2">1.1 Why <code>texi2html</code> and not <code>makeinfo</code>?</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC86"><code>manage_i18n.pl</code></a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC86">A.2 Adding new strings written to document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_8">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC62">paragraph</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC62">7.9.1 Paragraph and preformatted region formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC62">preformatted region</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC62">7.9.1 Paragraph and preformatted region formatting</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_9">R</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC57">reference</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC57">7.7 References</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_10">S</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">skipped command</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC3">source code for <code>texi2html</code>, downloading</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC3">2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_11">T</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC3"><code>texi2html</code> source, downloading</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC3">2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC1">Texinfo</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC1">1. Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">text alignement</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC60">7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">Translation</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC85">A.1 Translating strings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="SEC89_12">U</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">unknown command</a></td><td valign="top"><a href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="3"> <hr></td></tr>
+</table>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a href="#SEC89_0" class="summary-letter"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_1" class="summary-letter"><b>B</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_2" class="summary-letter"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_3" class="summary-letter"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_4" class="summary-letter"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_5" class="summary-letter"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_6" class="summary-letter"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_7" class="summary-letter"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_8" class="summary-letter"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_9" class="summary-letter"><b>R</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_10" class="summary-letter"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_11" class="summary-letter"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a href="#SEC89_12" class="summary-letter"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<hr size="6">
+<a name="SEC_Contents"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1>Table of Contents</h1>
+<div class="contents">
+
+<ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC1" href="#SEC1">1. Overview</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC2" href="#SEC2">1.1 Why <code>texi2html</code> and not <code>makeinfo</code>?</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC3" href="#SEC3">2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC4" href="#SEC4">3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC5" href="#SEC5">4. Invoking <code>texi2html</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC6" href="#SEC6">4.1 Specifying where to split the generated document</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC7" href="#SEC7">4.2 Setting output file and directory names</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC8" href="#SEC8">4.3 Specifying which regions get expanded</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC9" href="#SEC9">4.4 Command line options related to Texinfo language features</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC10" href="#SEC10">4.5 Page layout related command line options</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC11" href="#SEC11">4.6 Customizing the <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC12" href="#SEC12">4.7 Expanding <code>@tex</code> and <code>@math</code> regions using LaTeX2HTML</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC13" href="#SEC13">4.8 Use initialization files for fine tuning</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC14" href="#SEC14">5. Overview of initialization files content and loading</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC15" href="#SEC15">5.1 Redefining functions in initialization files</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC16" href="#SEC16">5.2 Conventions used for function prototypes</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC17" href="#SEC17">6. Fine tuning of the page layout</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC18" href="#SEC18">6.1 The different categories of pages and sectioning elements</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC19" href="#SEC19">6.2 Page layout and navigation panel overview</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC20" href="#SEC21">6.3 Customization of the navigation panels buttons</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC21" href="#SEC22">6.3.1 Controlling the navigation panel panel at a high level</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC22" href="#SEC23">6.3.2 Specifying the buttons formatting</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC23" href="#SEC24">6.3.3 Changing the navigation panel formatting</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC24" href="#SEC25">6.4 Main program variables and usefull functions</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC25" href="#SEC26">6.4.1 Accessing elements informations</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC26" href="#SEC27">6.4.2 Accessing global informations</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC27" href="#SEC31">6.4.3 Function usefull in page formatting</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC28" href="#SEC32">6.5 Preparing the output</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC29" href="#SEC33">6.6 Finalizing the output</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC30" href="#SEC34">6.7 Customizing the <code>texi2html</code> css lines</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC31" href="#SEC35">6.8 Customizing the page header</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC32" href="#SEC36">6.9 Customizing the sections</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC33" href="#SEC37">6.10 Customizing the page footer</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC34" href="#SEC38">6.11 Special pages formatting</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC35" href="#SEC39">6.11.1 Customizing the content of the special pages</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC36" href="#SEC40">6.11.1.1 Top element text formatting</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC37" href="#SEC41">6.11.1.2 Table of contents and Short table of contents</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC38" href="#SEC42">6.11.1.3 Formatting of footnotes text</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC39" href="#SEC43">6.11.1.4 Formatting of about text</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC40" href="#SEC44">6.11.2 Customizing the layout of the special pages</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC41" href="#SEC45">6.12 Customizing the file names</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC42" href="#SEC46">6.13 Generation of external files for index entries</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC43" href="#SEC47">7. Customizing <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style in init files</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC44" href="#SEC48">7.1 Three contexts for expansions: preformatted, normal and string</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC45" href="#SEC49">7.2 Customizing the formatting of commands without argument</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC46" href="#SEC50">7.3 Customizing accent, style and other simple commands</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC47" href="#SEC51">7.3.1 An interface for commands formatting with a hash reference</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC48" href="#SEC52">7.3.2 An interface for commands formatting with a string</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC49" href="#SEC53">7.3.3 Defining the style and indicatric commands interface</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC50" href="#SEC54">7.4 Formatting of special simple commands</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC51" href="#SEC55">7.5 Processing special characters in text</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC52" href="#SEC56">7.6 Customizing strings written by <code>texi2html</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC53" href="#SEC57">7.7 References</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC54" href="#SEC58">7.7.1 Reference to external manual</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC55" href="#SEC59">7.7.2 Reference to an internal node</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC56" href="#SEC60">7.8 Commands used for centering and flushing of text</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC57" href="#SEC61">7.9 Formatting or not a paragraph or a preformatted region</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC58" href="#SEC62">7.9.1 Paragraph and preformatted region formatting</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC59" href="#SEC63">7.9.2 Avoiding paragraphs in formats</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC60" href="#SEC64">7.10 Formatting of complex formats (<code>@example</code>, <code>@display</code>&hellip;)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC61" href="#SEC65">7.11 Customizing the formatting of lists and tables</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC62" href="#SEC66">7.11.1 Formatting individual table and list items</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC63" href="#SEC67">7.11.2 Formatting of a whole table or list</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC64" href="#SEC68">7.12 Definition commands formatting</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC65" href="#SEC69">7.12.1 Customizing the interpretation of a definition line</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC66" href="#SEC70">7.12.2 Customization of the definition formatting</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC67" href="#SEC71">7.13 Customizing headings formatting</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC68" href="#SEC72">7.14 Formatting of special regions (<code>@verbatim</code>, <code>@cartouche</code>, <code>@quotation</code>)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC69" href="#SEC73">7.15 Menu formatting</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC70" href="#SEC74">7.15.1 The structure of a menu</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC71" href="#SEC75">7.15.2 The formatting of the different menu components</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC72" href="#SEC76">7.16 Indices formatting</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC73" href="#SEC77">7.16.1 Formatting of index entries</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC74" href="#SEC78">7.16.2 Customizing the formatting of index lists</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC75" href="#SEC79">7.17 Floats and lists of floats</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC76" href="#SEC80">7.17.1 Formatting a float</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC77" href="#SEC81">7.17.2 Formatting lists of floats</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC78" href="#SEC82">7.18 Customizing the footnotes formatting</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC79" href="#SEC83">7.19 Customizing other commands, and unknown commands</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC80" href="#SEC84">A. Internationalization</a>
+ <ul class="toc">
+ <li><a name="TOC81" href="#SEC85">A.1 Translating strings</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC82" href="#SEC86">A.2 Adding new strings written to document</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC83" href="#SEC87">B. Command Line Option Index</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC84" href="#SEC88">C. Variable Index</a></li>
+ <li><a name="TOC85" href="#SEC89">D. Concept Index</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<hr size="1">
+<a name="SEC_Overview"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1>Short Table of Contents</h1>
+<div class="shortcontents">
+<ul class="toc">
+<li><a name="TOC1" href="#SEC1">1. Overview</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC3" href="#SEC3">2. Obtaining <code>texi2html</code></a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC4" href="#SEC4">3. Installation of <code>texi2html</code></a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC5" href="#SEC5">4. Invoking <code>texi2html</code></a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC14" href="#SEC14">5. Overview of initialization files content and loading</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC17" href="#SEC17">6. Fine tuning of the page layout</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC43" href="#SEC47">7. Customizing <acronym>HTML</acronym> and text style in init files</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC80" href="#SEC84">A. Internationalization</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC83" href="#SEC87">B. Command Line Option Index</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC84" href="#SEC88">C. Variable Index</a></li>
+<li><a name="TOC85" href="#SEC89">D. Concept Index</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<hr size="1">
+<a name="SEC_About"></a>
+<table cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" border="0">
+<tr><td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Top" title="Cover (top) of document">Top</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents">Contents</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC87" title="Index">Index</a>]</td>
+<td valign="middle" align="left">[<a href="#SEC_About" title="About (help)"> ? </a>]</td>
+</tr></table>
+<h1>About This Document</h1>
+<p>
+ This document was generated by <em>Derek R. Price</em> on <em>February, 3 2005</em> using <a href="http://texi2html.cvshome.org/"><em>texi2html 1.76</em></a>.
+</p>
+<p>
+ The buttons in the navigation panels have the following meaning:
+</p>
+<table border="1">
+ <tr>
+ <th> Button </th>
+ <th> Name </th>
+ <th> Go to </th>
+ <th> From 1.2.3 go to</th>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [ &lt; ] </td>
+ <td align="center">Back</td>
+ <td>previous section in reading order</td>
+ <td>1.2.2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [ &gt; ] </td>
+ <td align="center">Forward</td>
+ <td>next section in reading order</td>
+ <td>1.2.4</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [ &lt;&lt; ] </td>
+ <td align="center">FastBack</td>
+ <td>beginning of this chapter or previous chapter</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [ Up ] </td>
+ <td align="center">Up</td>
+ <td>up section</td>
+ <td>1.2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [ &gt;&gt; ] </td>
+ <td align="center">FastForward</td>
+ <td>next chapter</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [Top] </td>
+ <td align="center">Top</td>
+ <td>cover (top) of document</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [Contents] </td>
+ <td align="center">Contents</td>
+ <td>table of contents</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [Index] </td>
+ <td align="center">Index</td>
+ <td>index</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="center"> [ ? ] </td>
+ <td align="center">About</td>
+ <td>about (help)</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; </td>
+ </tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>
+ where the <strong> Example </strong> assumes that the current position is at <strong> Subsubsection One-Two-Three </strong> of a document of the following structure:
+</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li> 1. Section One
+ <ul>
+ <li>1.1 Subsection One-One
+ <ul>
+ <li>...</li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>1.2 Subsection One-Two
+ <ul>
+ <li>1.2.1 Subsubsection One-Two-One</li>
+ <li>1.2.2 Subsubsection One-Two-Two</li>
+ <li>1.2.3 Subsubsection One-Two-Three &nbsp; &nbsp;
+ <strong>&lt;== Current Position </strong></li>
+ <li>1.2.4 Subsubsection One-Two-Four</li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>1.3 Subsection One-Three
+ <ul>
+ <li>...</li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>1.4 Subsection One-Four</li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+</ul>
+
+<hr size="1">
+<p>
+ <font size="-1">
+ This document was generated by <em>Derek R. Price</em> on <em>February, 3 2005</em> using <a href="http://texi2html.cvshome.org/"><em>texi2html 1.76</em></a>.
+ </font>
+ <br>
+
+</p>
+</body>
+</html>